You are on page 1of 229

Western Michigan University

ScholarWorks at WMU

Dissertations Graduate College

8-1982

A Study of Hypnotic Age Regression Using the Rorschach Scored


by the Exner Comprehensive System
Scott William Trylch
Western Michigan University

Follow this and additional works at: https://scholarworks.wmich.edu/dissertations

Part of the Psychoanalysis and Psychotherapy Commons

Recommended Citation
Trylch, Scott William, "A Study of Hypnotic Age Regression Using the Rorschach Scored by the Exner
Comprehensive System" (1982). Dissertations. 2537.
https://scholarworks.wmich.edu/dissertations/2537

This Dissertation-Open Access is brought to you for free


and open access by the Graduate College at
ScholarWorks at WMU. It has been accepted for inclusion
in Dissertations by an authorized administrator of
ScholarWorks at WMU. For more information, please
contact wmu-scholarworks@wmich.edu.
A STUDY OF HYPNOTIC AGE REGRESSION
USING THE RORSCHACH SCORED BY THE
EXNER COMPREHENSIVE SYSTEM

by

Scott William Trylch

A Dissertation
Submitted to the
Faculty of The Graduate College
in p artial fu lfillm e n t of the
requirements for the
Degree of Doctor of Education
Department of Counseling and Personnel

Western Michigan University


Kalamazoo, Michigan
August 1982

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
A STUDY OF HYPNOTIC AGE REGRESSION USING THE

RORSCHACH SCORED BY THE EXNER

COMPREHENSIVE SYSTEM

Scott William Trylch, Ed.D.

Western Michigan University, 1982

The purpose of the study was to compare Rorschach results of

hypnotically age regressed subjects with three groups of controls:

deeply hypnotized, hypnotizable simulators, and minimally susceptible

simulators. The study tested the null hypothesis that hypnotically

age regressed subjects d iffe r sig nifican tly from subjects in deep

hypnosis, hypnotizable simulators, and minimally susceptible

simulators on Rorschach scores when scored by the Exner Comprehensive

System. A second null hypothesis was that there would be no

difference between the age regressed subjects and the three control

groups in correspondence to the Exner age norms.

The 24 volunteer subjects were screened for psychological

problems, then administered the Stanford Hypnotic Clinical

Scale-Adult and based on th e ir score assigned to the experimental or

one of three control groups.. Rorschach testing was counterbalanced

fo r the six subjects in each group; three taking a preexperimental

waking Rorschach, and three a postexperimental te s t. The subjects in

the age regression and deep hypnosis groups then practiced attaining

th e ir respective hypnotic states in three practice sessions. All

subjects were administered a Rorschach in th e ir respective

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
experimental condition. The Rorschachs were given by a second

experimenter, blind to the experiment. The Rorschachs were scored by

the experimenter. and another experimenter, also blind to the

experiment; differences in scoring were arbitrated.

An Analysis of Variance for change scores based on differences

between waking and respective experimental condition Rorschach score

means for the four groups yielded only chance differences. The

hypothesis that there would be no differences between the groups in

correspondence to children's age norms could not be rejected. I t was

tested by using Rorschach variables where the children mean differed

by two standard deviations from the adult mean.

It was concluded that the experiment did not demonstrate a

difference between age regressed, deeply hypnotized, hypnotizable

simulator, and minimally susceptible simulator groups on Rorschach

variables. However, the small number of subjects in each group

provided a low level of s ta tis tic a l power for detecting possible

significant differences.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
INFORMATION TO USERS

This reproduction was made from a copy o f a document sent to us for microfilming.
While the most advanced technology has been used to photograph and reproduce
this document, the quality of the reproduction is heavily dependent upon the
quality o f the material submitted.

The following explanation o f techniques is provided to help clarify markings or


notations which may appear on this reproduction.

1.The sign or “target” for pages apparently lacking from the document
photographed is “Missing Page(s)”. If it was possible to obtain the missing
page(s) or section, they are spliced into the film along with adjacent pages. This
may have necessitated cutting through an image and duplicating adjacent pages
to assure complete continuity.

2. When an image on the film is obliterated with a round black mark, it is an


indication of either blurred copy because o f movement during exposure,
duplicate copy, or copyrighted materials that should not have been filmed. For
blurred pages, a good image o f the page can be found in the adjacent frame. If
copyrighted materials were deleted, a target note will appear listing the pages in
the adjacent frame.

3. When a map, drawing or chart, etc., is part of the material being photographed,
a definite method o f “sectioning” the material has been followed. It is
customary to begin filming at the upper left hand comer o f a large sheet and to
continue from left to right in equal sections with small overlaps. If necessary,
sectioning is continued again—beginning below the first row and continuing on
until complete.

4. For illustrations that cannot be satisfactorily reproduced by xerographic


means, photographic prints can be purchased at additional cost and inserted
into your xerographic copy. These prints are available upon request from the
Dissertations Customer Services Department.

5. Some pages in any document may have indistinct print. In all cases the best
available copy has been filmed.

Uni
International
300 N. Zeeb Road
Ann Arbor, Ml 48106

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
8227138

Trylch, Scott William

A STUDY OF HYPNOTIC AGE REGRESSION USING THE RORSCHACH


SCORED BY THE EXNER COMPREHENSIVE SYSTEM

Western Michigan University EdD . 1982

University
Microfilms
International 300 N. Zeeb Road,Ann Arbor, M I 48106

Copyright 1982

by
Trylch, Scott William
All Rights Reserved

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

In memory of Merodean V. Trylch

I wish to acknowledge Dr. William A. Carlson's support, warmth,

caring and challenge throughout the dissertation process. I greatly

appreciated his a v a ila b ility and willingness to give time in order to

help me complete the study. I am also grateful to the other members of

my committee: Dr. Mai Robertson, Dr. Bob Oswald, and Dr. Michael

Stoline from whom I have learned a great deal and whose relationship I

value.

I especially want to thank Joyce Pull urn at the Mott Children’ s

Health Center fo r her long hours of typing the dissertation and helping

me with the revisions. I valued her support and caring that helped me

complete this project. I am also appreciative of David Littlehales at

the Hurley Medical Center for his efforts in learning to administer the

Rorschach, and his additional long hours in giving the test. I further

wish to thank Jim Buechele for his e ffo rt in scoring the protocols and

arbitrating the differences. Lastly, I would lik e to thank Demetra

C ollia and Nancy O llila at the Western Michigan University Computer

Center for th eir programming work.

A special thanks also goes to John E. Exner, J r ., Ph.D. for

allowing me to reproduce his adult and children's norms in the

dissertation. I also wish to thank the volunteers whose time and e ffo rt

made this study possible.

ii

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
I wish to especially thank my w ife, Darlene, who endured long hours

of my absence, and s t i l l more time at home spent in completing this

paper. I appreciated her loving concern, and help in completing the.

project. I also want to thank my sons, Jason and Jeremy, fo r s ile n tly

accepting my not being able to spend more time with them, and my long

hours away. One las t note of appreciation goes to Kelly, the c o llie ,

who couldn't understand where his master always went.

iii

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
TABLE OF CONTENTS

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS ......................................................................................... fi

LIST OF TABLES............................................................................................ vi

LIST OF FIGURES ............................................................ v ii

CHAPTER

I. INTRODUCTION ................................................................................ 1

Purpose of the S tu d y....................................................... 31

Hypotheses . . . .................................................................. 31

II. METHOD........................................................................................... 34

Subjects ............................................................................. 34

Procedure ........................................................................... 34

Data A nalysis.................................................................... 42

III. RESULTS ......................................................................................... 44

IV. DISCUSSION AND CONCLUSIONS ..................................................... 55

REFERENCE NOTES .......................................................................................... 52

REFERENCES.................................................................................................... 63

APPENDICES

A. P ilo t S tud y.................................................................................. 70

B. Handout Explanation to Potential Volunteers Describing


Involvement in Research Concerning Hypnosis ..................... 82

C. Informed Consent Form............................................................... 83

D. Debriefing ................................................................................... 84

E. Debriefing Handout ..................................................................... 85

F. Individual Subject Scores on the StanfordHypnotic


C linical Scale for Adults (SHCS-Adult) .............................. 85

G. A Note of Some Subjects Who ExperiencedSome


Distress Relation to the Experiment .................................... 87
iv

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Table of Contents—Continued

H. Percentage Agreement on In itia l Scoring fo r Experi­


menter and Additional Scorer fo r Each Response .................. 91

I. Rorschach Sequence of Scores and Structural Summary


for each Subject during Waking (Pre/Post) and Experi­
mental Sessions .................................................. 115

J. Exner Age Norms ............................................................................ 211

BIBLIOGRAPHY ................................................................................................. 213

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
LIS T OF TABLES

1. Group Totals and Means for the Four Groups on the Stanford
Hypnotic Clinical Scale-Adult (SHCS-Adult) and Age Regres­
sion Item....................................... 45

2. One-Way Analysis of Variance Testing Differences Between the


Stanford Hypnotic Clinical Scale-Adult (SHCS-Adult) Results
for the Four Experimental Groups.................................................... 45

3. One-Way Analysis of Variance Testing Differences Between the


Four Groups on the Age Regression Item of the Stanford Hypnotic
Clinical Scale-Adult (SHCS-Adult)..................................................... 46

4. Percentage Agreement on In it ia l Scoring for Experimenter and


Additional Scorer..................................... 47

5. Waking State Group Means fo r a ll Subjects..................................... 49

6. Experimental State Group Means fo r a ll Subjects.......................... 51

7. Mean Group Correspondence to Children's Age Norms During Ex­


perimental Condition 53

A. Rorschach Results fo r P ilo t Study Subjects................................... 73

B. Rorschach Means fo r Age Regressed and Waking State.................... 74

C. Correlated Sample t - tests Comparing Waking State and Age


Regressed RorschacFf Scores................................................................ 76

D. Waking State and Age Regression Sign Correspondence to Exner


Age Norms and Sign Test..................................................................... 77

vi

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
LIST OF FIGURES \. .

1. Flowchart o f Experimental Design and Procedure...................................41

2. P ilo t Study Experimental Design and Procedure........................... ,-....7 2

v ii

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
CHAPTER I

INTRODUCTION

Hypnotic age regression had long been used in psychotherapy for

the recovery of denied or repressed memories or fo r a cathartic

reexperience of traumatic emotional experiences. Dramatic instances

of its use have been recorded by Erickson and Kubie (1941), Lindner

(1944) and Wolberg (1964).

Lindner (1944) integrated the use of age regression with

psychoanalysis. He reported that hypnoanalysis would permit the

analyst to move past resistances to reconstruct e a rlie r lif e

experiences that were the genesis of current problems. Also, i t

would shorten the length of therapy from years down to three or four

months. His report on the course of treatment with a criminal

psychopath suggested that hypnoanalysis emphasizing age regression

was effective in the amelioration of criminal psychopathy.

Wolberg (1964) reported several processes by which the

uncovering of buried memories by age regression was helpful in

overcoming problems encountered by patients, such as the recall of

previous te rrify in g experiences from childhood and/or ones which

occurred in adulthood. This often resulted in a cathartic experience

that culminated in symptom removal. Another mechanism was the recall

of less intense traumas in childhood which had remained in the

unconscious, but which could be reframed according to adult knowledge

and interpretations.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
A poignant example of the clinical usefulness of hypnotic age

regression in other than traditional long-term psychotherapy was

offered by Erickson and Kubie (1941). In that case the patient was

in it ia lly uninterested in undergoing hypnotherapy, and was inducted

into trance by an indirect technique used by Erickson. This was

ju s tifie d because of the patient's increasing depression and the lack

of success of more traditional approaches. The focus of the

patient's symptomology, beyond the depression, was vomiting that

occurred a fte r her boyfriend attempted to kiss her. Under age

regression i t was revealed that the patient's mother had taught her

several misconceptions regarding sexuality that accounted for the

patient's vomiting. The patient's mother had died before she had an

opportunity to correct any of her e a rlie r teachings. Under hypnosis

and in the waking state Erickson took the place of the deceased

mother, and amended the e a rlie r teachings. This resulted in an

elimination of the vomiting when faced with sexuality and dramatic

decrease and alleviation of depressive symptomology.

Despite the dramatic claims fo r the therapeutic effectiveness of

hypnotic age regression in psychotherapy, the s c ie n tific v a lid ity of

the age regressed state has been d iffic u lt to support with

experimental data (Barber, 1962). Overall reviews of the lite ra tu re

(Barber, 1962; Kline, 1953; Gebhard, 1961; Hilgard, 1968; Yates,

1961) have explored several parameters relating to the controlled

study of hypnotic age regression which included the concept of the

age regressed state and causation, who can achieve age regression,

possible types of age regression, and dependent measures as well as

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
experimental designs used to test hypotheses concerning the

phenomenon.

Barber (1962) held that age regression was a form of role

playing. He supported his position by a careful review of the

lite ra tu re evaluating the outcomes and designs used in the study of

hypnotic age regression. His review indicated that many of the

studies demonstrated that subjects simulating or role playing a

ch ildlike state performed more lik e children on the dependent measure

than did those who were age regressed during a hypnotic trance. He

took the stance that experimental studies of age regression supported

the notion that age regressed subjects showed a mixture of adult and

ch ild like responses on whatever dependent measures were used. He

ended his review by hypothesizing that future studies would find no

difference between hypnotically age regressed and control subjects.

In contrast to the role playing theory was the functional

ablation theory. Edmonston (1961) described the state of age

regression under hypnosis as:

...th e /functional ablation theory, places greater


emphasis on what is done to the subject as i t
affects how he behaves during hypnotic age re­
gression. Bo.th learned and maturational behaviors
which appeared a fte r the age to which the subject is
regressed, are said to be functionally ablated by
the hypnotist and no longer accessible as part of
the subject's response repertory. This theory is
essentially one of verbal conditioning. The words
spoken by the hypnotist thus become the stimuli
evoking the various behaviors of hypnotic age re­
gression (Edmonston 1961, pg. 127).

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
To test the functional ablation theory, Edmonston developed an

eye blink conditioned response in.subjects then extinguished i t . He

then age regressed h a lf of the subjects to the acquisition period and

found "a close approximation of th eir acquisition behavior"

(Edmonston 1961, pg. 137). The control group continued to show

extinction. Barber (1962) la te r criticized the study on the grounds

that the subjects could have been simulating the conditioned

responses.

Hilgard (1968) in an examination of the lite ra tu re reported that

he could not accept the re a lity of complete ablation of experience

and revivication. He f e l t that age regression could be established

and measured with ch ild like handwriting during regression being one

such measure. However, he added that an observing ego would be

retained during age regression, and thus signs of adult behavior

would be evident.

In another review, Yates (1961) suggested that three theories

have been used to explain hypnotic age regression. The neurological

theory called fo r an organic reproduction of engrams produced at a

younger age, and an inhibition of the cortex, except fo r the area

that received auditory stimuli (from the hypnotic operator). The

habit reactivation theory postulated an inhibition of current

response patterns and thus permitted the reactivation of e a rlie r

response patterns. The role playing theory enjoined the subject to

experience a psychological condition allowing them to act in a role

that is much younger than th eir chronological age. I t was suggested

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
that a combination of the theories might best account for age

regression.

A champion of the neurological theory of age regression was

Kline (1953). He put forward the idea that age regression entailed

an alteratio n of the subject's time space continuum perception. This

was to involve a "central state of perceptual release or

disorientation which permits a c tiv ity in any dimension or direction

of time space orientation" (K line, 1953, pg. 26). Thus Kline f e lt

that hypnotic age regression was a valid state, but an experience

lim ited to only certain subjects, who had been able to become deeply

hypnotized.

Gebhard (1961) also addressed the issue of what accounts for

hypnotic age regression at a neurological level. He identified three

p o s s ib ilitie s . The f ir s t was the possibility that the subject was

responding on the basis of neural mechanisms established at the age

to which the subject was regressed (corresponds to the functional

ablation theory). Second, the subject may have used memories from

any age to role play or act out a role suggested by the experimenter.

Third, the subject's responses may be a combination of the f ir s t two

in varying amounts.

A basic neurological question was: what was the nature of

storage of previous experiences and memories in the brain, were

memories stored intact or were they selectively stored in a manner

that allowed fo r progressive change and decay over time? Penfield's

(1952) research indicated that electrical stimulation of certain

areas of the temporal cortex did result in a recollection or

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
reexperience of certain memories. The evoked recollection was a

reproduction of what the patient visually experienced or f e l t in the

situation. I t was not a reproduction of the whole experience and did

not include those elements of the environment to which the patient

did not attend orig in ally.

But he was not able to establish a specific single location for

memories. To account fo r the finding that extirpation of a certain

area of the cortex in one hemisphere did not result in the

elimination of a memory, Penfield (1952) f e lt that memories were

stored in each cerebral hemisphere. He postulated the existence of a

centrencephalic system which was a neurone system centrally placed in

the brain and equally connected to both hemispheres. This system was

to coordinate the various sensations associated with various memories

a fte r the temporal cortex was stimulated.

Penfield's research was done with patients that were subject to

temporal lobe epilepsy, and the research revealed only those memories

that spontaneously erupted under electrical stimulation. The

research did imply the possibility of intact storage of memories, and

that stimulation of the sensory areas of the cortex produced

responses particular to that area.

In a more recent summary (Gazzaniga, Steen, & Volpe, 1979)

stated that memory did not have one s ite , but more lik e ly multiple

neural representations. Further, they considered the biochemical

basis of memory and included the study of neurotransmitters, but were

not able to obtain any absolute proof of a specific neurotransmitter

involved in memory storage. They ended up postulating that memory

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
storage may include the whole history of an event, whose storage may

be at several sites and dependent upon reception from various

neurotransmitters.

The research on how stimulation of certain areas of the brain

e lic ite d memories seemed to run counter to modern theories of

learning, p articularly the consolidation model (Hilgard & Bower,

1966). Most learning theories called for learning through repetition

or reinforcement, and that under conditions of disuse memories faded.

However, hypnotic age regression purported that a ll experiences were

retained and may be accessible to the conscious mind under hypnosis.

While no d e fin itive proof was available from research, i t did

appear that memories could have been stored intact. This would have

suggested that hypnotic age regression could have been consistent

with the manner in which the brain stored memories. However, a more

detailed study of the lite ra tu re regarding the experimental

examination of the phenomena of age regression seemed in order.

Three areas of studies were reviewed, those that used physiological

c r ite ria , those that used psychological tests or c r ite ria , and those

that specifically used the Rorschach as the dependent measure.

Gidro-Frank and Bowersbuch (1948), McCranie and Crasilneck

(1955), True and Stephenson (1951) have studied subjects who were

regressed to infancy. The dependent measure was whether or not the

Babinski sign was reinstated. The studies found that the Babinski

sign was reinstated when the subject was regressed to younger than

five months of age. Barber (1962) critic ized these studies on

several grounds. F irs t, the dorsiflexion of the large toe (the

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Babinski sign) is not the characteristic response of the infant to

plantar stimulation. McGraw (1941) found that withdrawal of the limb

was the more characteristic response to plantar stimulation in

infants up to about seven months. Second, the Babinski response

might have been found in normal adults in conditions such as sleep,

drowsiness, e tc ., where depressed muscle tone occurs. Third, the

subjects may have been aware of the nature of the experiment and

simply given a Babinski response.

More recently Raikov (1980) studied age regression to infancy

with ten subjects regressed to infancy and measured across several

variables considered characteristic of infancy (Babinski sign,

sucking re fle x , crying, e tc .) with the hypnotic operators naive to

behavioral expectations in infancy. Only one of the subjects showed

a ll seven of the infant behaviors expected. The rest of the subjects

ranged from two to six behaviors. The experimenter concluded that

the reproduction under hypnosis of the components of early childhood

and infancy was possible to a certain degree. This research is

vulnerable to Barber's (1962) criticisms of early studies.

Others (Ford & Yeager 1948; Kupper, 1945; McCranie, Crasilneck &

Teter, 1955; Schwartz, Bickford & Rasmussen, 1955; True &

Stephenson, 1951) studied the effect of age regression on EEGs. In

Kupper's (1945) study a twenty-four-year-old patient with convulsive

seizures was studied taking EEGs at several ages during hypnotic age

regression. The EEGs remained normal until age eighteen which was

the hypothesized onset of the patient's symptomology following a

period of great anxiety. Ford and Yeager (1948) used a sim ilar

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
design and were not able to replicate the e a rlie r findings. A

patient that had been given a craniotomy because of a history of

grand mal seizures was regressed to a preoperative age with rid

difference found between regressed and waking state. Schwartz et

a l. (1955) concluded that seizures could be reactivated by age

regressing subjects to the time of th e ir la s t seizure. The induced

seizures were not accompanied by a change in the EEGs. McCranie et

a l. (1955) and True and Stephenson (1951) had found that subjects

regressed back as fa r as age one month showed an EEG no different

from th e ir adult EEG.

I t appeared that the evidence was equivocal with regard to EEGs

being altered under hypnotic age regression. Barber (1962)

c ritic ize d the aforementioned Kupper (1945) study on the grounds that

the patient showed highly episodic seizures that centered around a

personal c o n flict. Thus, i t was reasoned that EEG alterations might

have resulted without the use of hypnotic age regression.

The use of conditioning techniques fo r the study of hypnotic age

regression has also been explored, as in Edmonston's (1961) study

cited above. Edmonston found that an experimental group showed some

return o f' a conditioned reflex under hypnotic age regression vs. a

control group, when both groups had extinguished the conditioned

reflex prior to the experimental testing.

In a sim ilar study by McCranie and Crasilneck (1955) using six

subjects, the results were equivocal. The subjects had been

conditioned to withdraw th e ir hand when presented with an auditory

stimulus, this was lost during age regression. The same subjects

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
retained an eyelid reflex conditioned to a tap on the w rist,

irregardless of th e ir age. Le Cron (1952) also found that under age

regression subjects showed an absence of conditioned responses when

presented with the conditioned auditory stimulus. A much e a rlie r

study by Gakkenbush, Polinkovskii, and Fundiller (1930) used one

subject and found that when the subject was regressed to age nine

months fear of a burning match had to be conditioned.

In a unique study True (1949) examined subjects' a b ility to

recall the day of the week that Christmas and th eir birthdays fe ll

on. F ifty subjects were age regressed to age four, seven, and ten.

The responses were compared against a 200 year calendar. During age

regression 82.3% of the subjects stated the correct response, the

other 17.7% answered less than half of the questions correctly.

Inaccurate responses increased at regressed age four, which is

consistent with developmental age expectations. The exact frequency

of recall during the waking state was not stated but was reported to

be "extremely small" (True, 1949 pg. 584).

Attempts to replicate True's (1949) findings in similar

experiments were attempted (Barber, 1962; Best, & Micheals, 1954;

R eiff & Scheer, 1969, Yates, 1960) with mixed results. None of the

studies used as many subjects, even put together, as the original

study done by True.

Barber (1962) c ritic ize d True's (1949) study on several grounds.

He stated that many nursery school age children don't know the day of

the week when asked. Indeed the original results showed a lower

recollection rate of Christmas and birthday dates when age regressed

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
to age four and higher rates of date recollection when the subjects

were regressed to age 10. Critici-sms were, also made that the

subjects may have spoken among themselves about the nature of the *

experiment and that they may have been able to "figure out" the days

asked about by computation in th e ir head. Of the two, the former

criticism seemed plausible but the la tte r untenable.

Another interesting experiment was presented by As (1962). The

subject who as a child spoke Swedish, was age regressed to childhood.

During age regression, he responded to questions presented in English

with answers in Swedish. This seemed to imply an incomplete age

regression, or to support the postulate that hypnotic age regression

did not involve a complete ablation of experiences a fte r the age to

which the subject is regressed.

The use o f Piagetian type perceptual cognitive tests were

u tilize d by R eiff and Scheerer (1960) with five subjects. The age

regressed subjects were more able to perform at the regressed age

level according to European norms. In reviews of the study, Barber

(1962) indicated that European norms of Piagetian tasks may not be

appropriate for American and B ritish children. Orne and O'Connell

(1961) found fa u lt with the study because the age regressed subjects

had more practice than did the simulators.

In a replication of the R eiff and Scheerer (1960) study,

O'Connell, Shor and Orne (1970) added control groups to obtain a

more sophisticated design. One group was to pretend to be

hypnotized, with the hypnotist not having known which subjects were

real and which were simulators (cryptosimulators). The intention of

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
such a maneuver was to maximize motivation in simulators. Other

groups were run to replicate the e a rlie r study.

The outcome of the experiment provided no evidence for

hypermnesia with age regression, the performance of the

cryptosimulating group equaled that of the age regressed group with

striking subjective alterations during hypnotic age regression, but

no overwhelming evidence fo r hypnosis vs. role playing. The authors

concluded that the study brought the v a lid ity of age regression into

question.

In reviewing the O'Connell et a l. (1970) study, i t was easy to

have been impressed by the standards for experimental design laid

down by the experimenters. However, in terms of the

cryptosimulators, one wondered (even with supposed nonsusceptibles)

where simulationends and hypnosis begins. Could the

cryptosimulators in fact have been hypnotizedby a powerful indirect

induction technique? (Erickson, Rossi & Rossi, 1976; Erickson &

Rossi, 1979 & 1981).

S t ill other investigators used other dependent measures to study

age regression. Walker, Garrett & Wallace (1976) and Wallace (1978)

found that age regressed subjects were able to show a restoration of

eidetic imagery. The dependent measure in these studies was

reproduction of random dot stereograms. Spanos, Fehana & Hendrikus,

(1979) were not able to replicate those findings.

In a classic study (Stalmaker & Riddle, 1932) subjects were

better able to recall poetry learned e a rlie r when age regressed

rather than in a waking state. Efforts in sim ilar experiments (Huse,

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
1930; M itchell, 1932; Rosenthal, 1944; Sears, 1954; White, 1940;

Young, 1926) ended with mixed and,inconclusive results.

Responses to the Ponzo and Poggendorff illusions under age

regression have also been evaluated (Parrish, Lundy & Leibowitz,

1969). The 10 subjects were screened by Barber's Suggestibility

Scale (BSS), (Barber & Glass, 1962), the selected subjects were

presented Ponzo and Poggendorf illusions under four conditions:

waking state, hypnotized without age regression, hypnotized with age

regression to age 9 and to age 5. The results indicated that

hypnosis fa c ilita te d the return of visual cues and mannerisms

suggestive of e a rlie r stages of perceptual development when compared

to a control group under task motivation, the effect was more

pronounced fo r the Ponzo than fo r the Poggendorf illu sio n.

Platonow (1933) reported that three subjects age regressed and

given the Binet Simon at regressed ages of four, six, and 10 gave

test data generally consistent with these ages. This was

accomplished despite only a b rie f hypnotic induction and the

suggestion that each subject would become a child of six, e tc ., being

repeated three times.

In related research, Young (1940) age regressed 10 subjects to

age three and obtained mental ages on the Stanford Binet (1916

Edition) that averaged age four years eight months. The

nonausceptible controls obtained an average mental age of fiv e years

fiv e months. I t was noted that the induction technique used in the

above study and in Young's (1937) prior report was to suggest a fte r

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
an in it ia l induction that the subject was three years old, without

any other deepening or age regression technique.

In a s lig h tly rnore sophisticated study, because of the

measurement of the subject's hypnotizability with the

Friedlander-Sarbin Scale of Hypnotizability (1938), Sarbin (1950)

gave the Stanford-Binet to nine age regressed subjects. I t was found

that the mental age obtained with testing was always higher than the

age to which the subjects were regressed. I t was concluded that

"there is no authentic and complete regression to e a rlie r age-roles

insofar as intelligence tests are concerned" (Sarbin, 1950, pg. 225).

Kline (1950) used the Otis Self-Administering Test of Mental

A b ility with 10 subjects, however there was no testing for

hypnotizability. The subjects were regressed to ages 15, 10, and

eight, the scores obtained during age regression were appropriate for

the norms of the suggested age and remained constant fo r the

subjects.

The use of the Stanford-Bi net to test an age regressed subject

was also investigated by Spiegel, Shor, and Fishman (1945). The

subject was regressed to several different ages and given the

Stanford-Binet. The results showed the subject to score very close

to the suggested age, sometimes slightly lower, sometimes higher.

Changes in the subjects' scores over time were correlated with l if e

events, such as moving from a rural to urban environment. I t was

reasoned that hypnotic age regression resulted in an ablation of a ll

memories that would have occurred a fte r the regressed age. This was

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
thought to result in the releasing of the personality and

intelligence manifestations of the appropriate age;-

One comparison between the Sarbin (1950) and Spiegel et a l.

(1945) studies was the hypnotic technique used to age regress the

subjects. In the former study, a fte r the induction of trance, the

subjects were d irectly suggested to be a specific age. In the la tte r

study, more time seemed to be taken in suggesting the ablation of

experiences. In addition, the subject was introduced to "a friend'1

who became consistent with the regressed age. The point in the

comparison was that in the Sahbin (1950) investigation where the

technique was direct with less e ffo rt to deepen trance in order to

age regress the subject, the results did not support the authenticity

of age regression. In the Spiegel et a l. (1945) study more time and

e ffo rt were spent to establish the ablation of experiences and to

introduce the subject to "a friend" who was consistent with the

regressed age. This study obtained data more supportive of the

authenticity of age regression. Therefore, i t seemed warranted to

indicate that studies of hypnotic age regression ought to be able to

assure that subjects are s u ffic ien tly deep in trance to permit age

regression.

Gakkenbush et a l. (I960)-, Keir (1945), and Leeds (1949) have

used intelligence tests to study changes during hypnotic age

regression. These inquiries used only one subject, so

generalizations from them were limited. However, the Gakkenbush et

al., (1960) investigation showed mental age on the Binet consistent

with the age to which the subject had been regressed. In the Leeds

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
(1949) study, vocabulary definitions were higher than expected for

the age to which the subject was regressed.

The use of cognitive perceptual tasks was also employed in a

report by Gard and Kurtz (1979). The tests u tilized were the

Stanford-Binet, Goodenough Draw-A-Person and Bender Gestalt. The

sixteen subjects were screened fo r psychopathology and assigned to

experimental and simulator groups according to scores on the BSS.

The study fa iled to find measured cognitive differences between the

simulators and experimental subjects in the age regressed condition.

The subjects had been hypnotized by a taped induction and then age

regressed to seven using a detailed suggestion process.

In an e a rlie r study, Crasilneck and Micheal (1957) used the

Bender Gestalt to measure performance under age regression. The 10

subjects were judged to be somnambulistic. The Bender was

administered in four ways*, during the waking state, with instructions

to pretend to be four years of age, hypnotized and instructed to be

age four, and hypnotically regressed to age four. The experimenters,

who judged the Bender protocols, were blind to the nature of the

experiment and were called upon to judge the age of each of the

Bender protocols. The authors concluded that the subjects were able

to comply to a certain degree but did not seem to reach the level

suggested. The subjects, functioning as th eir own control, acted

more lik e the age suggested under hypnosis than in the waking state,

and some approximated the suggested age even more when hypnotized and

age regressed.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Several authors (Dolin, 1960; Gard & Kurtz, 1979; Gakkenbush,

1960; Kline & Guze, 1951; • Taylor, 1950) have used drawings to

evaluate changes during hypnotic age regression. The Gakkenbush

(1960) study found the age regressed drawings to have been identical

with samples from the subjects' childhood. Kline & Guze (1951)

reported that the subjects' drawings under age regression were more

prim itive than the waking state drawings. The Taylor (1950) and Orne

(1951) inquiries found that the drawings done during hypnotic age

regression showed a mixture of ch ildlike and adult responses, and

thus, were regarded as not being supportive of genuine age

regression. Further, a personal communication from Karen Machover to

Orne (1951) suggested that the drawings in the study were not lik e

drawings typ ically made by six year olds.

The Thematic Apperception Test (TAT) has been used as a

dependent variable to assess hypnotic age regression on several

occasions. Kline and Haggerty (1953) studied the origin of

vocational interests using the TAT with a single subject. The

subject was regressed to several ages and also asked to simulate

these ages in the waking state. The findings showed more childlike

alterations in verbal productivity during age regression than in

waking simulation. The findings were used to support the v a lid ity of

hypnotic age regression.

Reyher and Shoemaker (1961) used the TAT to study conflict

resolution in psychoanalytic psychotherapy. The five deeply

hypnotizable subjects were given randomly selected TAT cards with

instructions given in trance fo r some of the cards to activate

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
disturbing emotions (co n flict cards) and others to activate

meaningful but not disturbing .emotions (neutral cards). Post

hypnotic suggestions were given suggesting that when the cards were

readministered in the waking state the same emotions would be f e l t as

before but they were to be revealed d irectly or indirectly in the TAT

stories. The results indicated that the conflict cards exposed more

underlying repressed material in the age regressed state than in the

waking state. The large differences between the waking state and

hypnotically regressed state on the neutral cards was taken as

evidence that hypnosis was an altered state of awareness where

"unconscious drives tend to be perceived in terms of gratification

rather than threat." (Reyher & Shoemaker, 1961, pg. 413).

The real-simulator design was used by Schofield and Reyher

(1974) to study differences in TAT and Symonds Picture Story Test

stories with hypnotically aroused conflict in age regressed and

waking states. The 22 female subjects had been screened for lack of

evident psychopathology and were able to carry out several tasks on

the Stanford Scale of Hypnotic Susceptibility (Weitzenhoffer &

Hi 1gard, 1962). A conflict was induced during hypnosis and the same

instructions were given to the simulators, but without them being

hypnotized. After that card 2 of the TAT and card B8 of the Symonds

Picture Story Test were administered during age regression or

stimulation and in the waking state. The outcome of the study was

considered to at least p a rtia lly support the altered state model of

hypnosis. The hypnotic subjects gave more direct drive expression

responses, and showed greater changes in affective motivational

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission
states when comparisons were made between age regressed and waking

states on one of the two thematic cards,. The hypnotic subjects, when

compared to the simulators, were also able to produce more intense

emotional reactions in the age regressed condition and reported more

vivid and emotional experiences during age regression. The one

comparison where the simulators appeared to be more lik e the

regressed age was on WISC Vocabulary subscale scores, where the

hypnotic subjects scored higher than the simulators when compared to

th e ir WAIS score on the same subtest.

The studies using the TAT and other thematic stories had

generally supported the ablation theory of hypnotic age regression.

I t was f e lt that the Rorshcach would provide an even more ambiguous

stimulus, and thus, would have been a very useful dependent variable

to assess hypnotic age regression.

Bergman, Graham, & Leavitt (1947) used hypnotic age regression

to validate Rorschach responses given during age regression to

various ages. They stated th e ir support for the v a lid ity of age

regression, and cited some supportive evidence from the lite ra tu re .

They suggested that when the Rorschach was administered at several

age levels i t would be of interest for four reasons. F irs t, the

Rorschach would be d iffic u lt to simulate, therefore i t became a

useful dependent variable. Second, i f regression produced a valid

alteration in the personality i t would have been measured by the

Rorschach. Also, the series of Rorschachs might have resulted in a

developmental history of diagnostic and therapeutic value. Lastly,

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
the Rorschachs were expected to show change over time, reflective of

personality change.

The subject was a twenty-year-old male conversion neurotic

following traumatic battle experiences that had brought additional

stress on a rather rig id character structure. He was given the

Rorschach in the waking state and then hypnotized to eight d ifferen t

ages from three to 17.The results in the in itia l hypnotic state

showed a s h ift to less rigid determinants; greater M, FC versus F and

FC‘ according to the Klopfer scoring system (Klopfer, Ainsworth,

Klopfer & H olt, 1954).

During age regression several factors were noted in the

Rorschach protocols suggestive of younger functioning, such as a

decrease in number of responses according to age, general increase in

animal movement (FM) and animal content (A%) with younger regressed

age, and color naming (Cn) present at regressed age three and fiv e .

The authors concluded that the Rorschach reflected changes in

functioning held to be consistent with the regressed age and in

keeping with the clin ica l picture revealed in a reconstructive

therapy.

Previously Keir (1945) had found less inhibition in the age

regressed Rorschach of a patient versus those results found in the

waking state. Two subsequent investigations (Mercer & Gibson, 1950;

Norgab, in LeCron ed., 1952) were essentially replications of the

Bergman et a l. (1947) study. In the Mercer and Gibson (1950) report,

the subject was a twenty-six-year-old alcoholic with a strong

co n flict between passive dependent needs and aggressive trends. The

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
subject was found to be a good hypnotic subject and was regressed on

three successive days to ages s ix , 10, and 14. During each age

regression session the subject was given the Rorschach, the

Stanford-Binet Vocabulary, and the Goodenough Draw-A-Person. After

the series of age regression sessions, the subject was given the

Rorschach in the waking state. The authors did not focus on scoring

the Rorschachs, instead they dealt with content interpretations. It

was concluded that because the te s t data was consistent with

expectations a t various age levels that a true regression had been

established. The problem was that this interpretation was based on

the author's interpretation of the Rorschach protocols and on the

performance on the other tests. The Rorschach scoring was not

reported and no age norm expectancies were evident.

Another way to study hypnosis using the Rorschach was reported

by Hodge and Wagner (1969). One subject, a thirty-one-year-old

psychiatric patient, took the Rorschach in a lig h t, medium, and deep

trance state. The Rorschach results indicated more primary process

thinking as the depth of trance increased. An evident oedipal theme

became even more pronounced in the deeper trance state. In addition

to interpretation of the content, the authors scored the protocols

and made a'comparison of the results. For instance, the subject's F+

was 100% in the waking state, 83% in medium trance, and 57% in deep

trance. This showed in a quantitative fashion the decrease of ego

functioning for the subject in deep trance.

What was of interest in the Hodge and Wagner (1969) study, with

regard to studying age regression with hypnosis, was the finding that

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
a deep trance state alone had been correlated with Rorschach

protocols that would be suggestive of childlike functioning. On the

other hand, ' could the subject in a deep trance state have

spontaneously slipped into an age regression?

The Rorschach has also been used as a stimuli for hypnotically

induced dreams. Wiseman and Reyher (1973) hypnotized 13

somnambulistic subjects, and handed them the Rorschach cards one at a

time with the suggestion that they look at the card and then dream

about the card. They were la te r given the Rorschach in the usual

manner. I t had been hypothesized that the standard administration of

the Rorschach, done a fte r the induced dreams, would show more primary

process thinking. The results in both the in it ia l experiment and a

refined replication tended to support the hypotheses that the

postdream Rorschach administrations resulted in more primary process

material in the Rorschach protocol. In the second study, the

experimental group was compared both to a waking and a simulating

control group.

In terms of Rorshach scores, the experimental group showed a

decrease in F+% and a significant increase in FM and M%. The

protocols were also scored by Holt's (1960) method for assessing

primary and secondary process.

The studies, that have been thus fa r reviewed wherein the

Rorschach had been used as a dependent variable, have indicated that

responses to the Rorschach may be altered during or because of

hypnosis. But they were limited because of using only one subject,

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
or because they did not test the v a lid ity of age regression as a

state, or did not u tiliz e age regression.

Closer to an experimental study of age regression in hypnosis

u tiliz in g the Rorschach as the dependent measure was Orne's (1951)

investigation. This inquiry was reviewed above regarding the finding

that figure drawings produced in the age regressed state showed a

mixture of adult and ch ildlike characteristics. The procedure was to

hypnotize 10 somnambulistic subjects and directly suggest that they

were six years old. During regression, the Rorschach was

administered followed by figure drawings. Two to five days la te r the

tests were readministered. In reviewing the Rorschach test findings,

Orne (1951) noted changes in the age regressed protocols. But he

also stated that the Rorschachs showed features which he f e l t would

never be expected in the record of a six-year-old child. He reasoned

that while deep personality changes were reflected in the Rorschach

protocols of age regressed subjects, that the subjects continued to

show the personality organization of the adult.

The fir s t true experimental study using the Rorschach to

investigate hypnotic age regression was done by Staples and Wilensky

(1968). In that study nine subjects, who had been screened by the

Davis and Husbund Scale (1931)' fo r hypnotizability, were assigned at

random to two experimental groups and a control group. The

experiment consisted of meeting with each subject individually for

four sessions.

The f ir s t session was a screening session with the subjects

developing a lig h t trance. In the second session, the two

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
experimental groups were placed in deep hypnosis to the

somnambulistic le v e l, and asked to perform simple imaginative acts.

The control subjects were asked to perform the imaginative acts

without hypnosis. In the third session the f i r s t experimental group

was hypnotized, age regressed to six and given the Rorschach, with

posthypnotic amnesia suggested. During the third session, the second

experimental and control groups were given the Rorschach in the

waking state. In the fourth session the f i r s t experimental group was

given the Rorschach in the waking state while the second experimental

group was age regressed to age six. Thus, the order of presentation

of the Rorschach to the two experimental groups was counterbalanced,

while the controls practiced imaginative acts before being asked to

simulate being age six while taking the Rorschach.

A repeated measures analysis of variance showed significant

differences between the age regressed/simulated age six and waking

states on developmental level scores, but not between the

experimental and control groups. A developmental level score based

on the principles established by Phillips and Smith (1953) was also

used. These scores clustered close together and did not show greater

regression among the members of the experimental group.. The

authors' concluded that the data did not show more authentic

regression among the age regressed subjects than among the

simulators. They further reported that they did not replicate

Sarbin's (1950) e a rlie r finding that regressed performance was more

authentic than simulated regression.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
A second experiment that investigated hypnotic age regression

with the Rorschach was done by Solomon and Goodson (1971). The

hallmark of this study was the a v a ila b ility of Rorschachs actually

done by the subjects during adolescence (average age about 13 at

in it ia l testin g ). The 11 subjects were assigned to experimental or

control groups a fte r obtaining th e ir score on the Stanford Hypnotic

Susceptibility Scale, Form C (Weitzenhoffer & Hi 1gard, 1962).

All subjects were given an adult waking Rorschach in the f ir s t

session. The experimental group was given eight to ten hours of

practice in hypnosis prior to the age regression session; the control

group spent three to fiv e hours working with lig h t states of

hypnosis. The testers who administered the Rorschachs in the

simulation and regressed conditions were blind to the purpose of the

experiment. The hypnotic subjects were led to a somnambulistic state

and tested, while the simulators were told that they were being

tested fo r th e ir a b ility to pretend.

Interspersed in the practice sessions were several test

sessions. One was a memory session in which the subjects were to

reproduce th e ir original adolescent Rorschach from memory. Then

there was a simulation session fo r a ll subjects. Lastly, there was

the c ritic a l age regression session for the experimental group and a

second simulation fo r the controls.

The a v a ila b ility of Rorschachs actually produced by the subjects

between the ages of nine to fifteen allowed fo r a comparison with the

Rorschach produced by the same subject during the experiment. The

original Rorschach was compared with each subsequent protocol by a

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
method "which involved consideration of substantive content, location

and intellectual and/or affective determinants of percepts" (Solomon

and Goodson, 1971 pg. 249). The results • indicated that when

comparing the level of correspondence between the original Rorschachs

and those produced in the experimental or control conditions no

overall difference was found between the experimental and control

groups. Developmental scores were also calculated in the manner used

in the aforementioned Staples and Wilensky (1968) study. Again no

significant differences were found between the experimental and

control groups. The use of standardized age norms (Beck, L evitt &

Molish, 1961) allowed another comparison to be made between the

groups. It was concluded that the Rorschach scores were more

adolescent lik e in both the simulation and age regressed condition

than in the waking state. However, the Rorschachs of the age

regressed subjects were not more adolescent like than those of the

simulators. The authors did find that W, %W, and R were most lik e ly

to d iffe r between the adult and regressed or simulated Rorschachs.

I t was reported that the data supported the role playing theory

of hypnotic age regression. However, the authors noted that hypnotic

age regression may function to reproduce experiences which are

retrievable and the subject may role play those that are not

retrievable.

While the Staples and Wilensky (1968) and Solomon and Goodson

(1971) studies both used the d iffic u lt to simulate Rorschach as the

criterion measure in th e ir studies of age regression, the actual

manner in which to quantify the data became d iffic u lt because

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Rorschach protocols have been scored and evaluated in many ways. One

way to evaluate Rorschach data is to look for significant.differences

of any kind between the regressed and simulating groups. A second is

to check the data obtained under various conditions against

developmental norms. Both of these approaches called fo r well

developed age norms and for the Rorschach to be a relia b le test

instrument.

Exner (1974, 1978, Note 1; Exner, Weiner, & Schuyler, 1976) has

developed a well researched scoring system and age norms fo r the

Rorschach. This allows researchers to compare Rorschach protocols

with norms based on samples of over one hundred subjects at each age.

Thus, i t is possible to directly compare the Rorschach performance

expectations of a five-year-old with those of an adult. Exner (1978)

has also established more psychometric respectability for the

Rorschach. He found test retest correlation coefficients ranging

from .66 to .90 for 100 nonpatient adults when the second testing

took place 35 to 38 months a fte r the f ir s t . That finding took place

across several scoring variables. Also, his statements about the

interpretation of various response categories are often backed by

research.

Another research consideration was the manner in which the

subjects were tested fo r hypnotizability. In the experimental

studies on age regression using the Rorschach as the dependent

variable both the Stanford Scale for Hypnotizability Form C

(Weitzenhoffer and Hi!gard, 1962) and the Davis and Husbund Scale

(1931) had been used. Other studies reviewed had used the Barber

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Suggestibility Scale (Barber & Glass, 1962) and the Friedlander and

Sarbin Scale (1938). The general assumption had been that screening

fo r subjects who were'deeply hypnotizable and/or somnambulistic would

provide the best subjects. These scales did only limited

screening/testing of age regression. However, another scale had been

developed that more directly measured susceptibility to hypnotic age

regression.

The Stanford Hypnotic Clinical Scale fo r Adults (SHCS-Adult) had

been developed by Morgan and Hilgard (1978/1979). This scale allowed

a more direct measure of hypnotic age regression in a standardized

situation. Although the measure was based on the subject's report,

it did allow the examiner to regress the subject to oneof the

elementary school years. The subject was then asked to rate the

experience on a scale that ranged from one to fiv e . A score of one

suggested no experience of regression, a score of five suggested that

the subjects experienced themselves as reliving a past experience.

The issue of standardized hypnotic inductions and possible

incomplete or less than optimal hypnotic techniques to establish age

regression was also evident from the lite ra tu re review. Previous

research had pointed out some variations in performance between age

regressed subjects and simulators based on cue structure provided by

the hypnotist (McConkey and Sheehan, 1980). Also Schirado (1979)

found that the depth of trance increased as induction techniques

became more personalized. His research reached the conclusion that

technique plays a significant role in hypnotic results, doubt was

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
expressed regarding the use of standardized techniques in research on

clin ica l hypnosis.

The lite ra tu re also suggested that not only must individualized

hypnotic techniques be employed, but particular hypnotic techniques

have been reported to be especially useful in fa c ilita tin g age

regression. Erickson (Haley, 1967) noted the advantages of the use

of a confusion technique building upon truisms found in everyday l i f e

to be an effective hypnotic technique in the establishment of age

regression. I t was also suggested that the hypnotic operator must

become someone out of or consistent with the subjects past during the

age regression in order to be consistent with the regressed age.

Thus, i t seemed that given the established usefulness of age

regression in psychotherapy, and the enhancement of techniques for

its measurement, that a further study of hypnotic age regression is

indicated. The study w ill u tiliz e the Rorschach because of its

ambiguity and the d iffic u lty in distorting results. The Rorschach's

usefulness, as a dependent measure, is enhanced by the development of

the Exner Comprehensive System (Exner, 1974, 1978) which provides age

norms and the sound empirical basis of the system. The SHCS-Adult

shows promise as a technique fo r screening those subjects that were

most susceptible to age regression. Lastly, personalized induction

and age regression techniques w ill be used in an e ffo rt to provide

optimal conditions fo r the development of age regression.

Several issues regarding experimentation with hypnosis has to be

addressed. The advantages of selecting highly hypnotizable subjects

has already been stated; further support for that position came from

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Yates (1961) and Orne (in Fromm & Shor eds., 1972). But the issue of

handling the simulators or control group has been a thorny problem in

hypnotic research. Orne (in Fromm & Shor eds., 1972) challenged the

stance that special efforts must be made to motivate the control

group. He stated that the hypnotic relationship was not

characterized by a high level of motivation on the subject's part to

please the hypnotist, any more than any other subject examiner

relationship. Thus, the need fo r specific training fo r control group

simulators is questioned. This stands in contrast to Barber's (1962)

assertation that simulators in hypnotic experiments are not properly

motivated and are often not given training sessions. He argues

fu rth er, that the lack of training allows the simulators to feel

awkward in the experimental situation. But Orne (in Fromm & Shor

eds., 1972) argues that special training fo r simulators w ill lessen

th e ir spontaneity and develop a fear of looking foolish. Weighing

both arguments, the experimenter w ill not provide pretraining for

simulation control groups.

Another experimental design issue related to the real-simulator

or cryptosimulator design calls fo r the hypnotist to be blind as to

which subjects were hypnotized and which were simulating. Despite

Orne's (in Fromm & ' Shor eds.,' 1972) -documented claims to the

contrary, i t is f e l t that simulators in such a design may become

hypnotized. Erickson (Erickson, Rossi & Rossi, 1976; Erickson &

Rossi, 1979, 1981) has written of the advantages of indirect

approaches to trance induction even with d iffic u lt or supposedly

unhypnotizable subjects. Consequently, the real-simulator or

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
cryptosimulator technique is rejected as part of the experimental

design because it is feared that the simulators could become

hypnotized with that procedure.

Another point to consider had been made by Barber (1962). He

noted that in most experiments with hypnosis the highly susceptible

experimental group was compared with a group of nonsusceptible

controls. The inclusion of an additional control group of

hypnotizable but not hypnotized subjects appears necessary.

Purpose of the Study

This study is intended to compare the Rorschach results scored

according to Exner Comprehensive System (1974, 1978) of a group of

age regressed subjects with the Rorschachs of control groups of

minimally susceptible simulators, hypnotizable but not hypnotized

simulators, and a group of deeply hypnotized but not age regressed

subjects. The study is to evaluate the v a lid ity of age regression as

measured by the Rorschach when scored by the Exner comprehensive

system.

Hypotheses

The hypotheses formally stated in the null form are as follows:

1. There w ill be no difference in Rorschach scores

between hypnotically age regressed subjects, minimally

hypnotizable simulators, hypnotizable simulators, and

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
deeply hypnotized and age regressed subjects.

2. Rorschach scores fo r the experimental group w ill not

show more correspondence to children's age norms than •

w ill the Rorschach scores fo r the control groups.

In relation to the above null hypotheses the most important Rorshcach

variables to be considered are:

D Detail response

S White space response

M Inanimate movement

FC Form color

FD Form based dimensional response

A% Percentage of animal responses

EA:ep Ratio of experience actual to

experience potential

Fd Food content

ALOG Autistic Logic special score

PER Personal special score

INCOM Inappropriate Combinations special

score

FC:CF+C Ratio of form color responses

to color form and pure color

and responses

C+Cn Color plus color naming responses

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
These scores were selected by comparing the Exner age norms

children (Exner, Note 1) with those fo r adults (Exner, 1978).

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
CHAPTER I I

METHOD

Subjects

Subjects were selected from volunteers who were w illin g to

participate in an experiment dealing with hypnosis. Subjects were at

least 18 years of age. The selection process was not based on other

demographic characteristics such as age, sex, race or socioeconomic

status. The main criterion fo r selection was the level of

hypnotizability as measured by the Stanford Hypnotic Clinical

Scale-Adult (SHCS-Adult). However, subjects were not included in the

experiment who manifested during the in it ia l contact, signs of

psychopathology or mental deficiency.

A total of 24 subjects were selected after the in itia l

SHCS-Adult screening. The subjects were assigned to the experimental

or one of three control groups on the basis of th eir SHCS-Adult

results. Each group had six subjects. A subject who dropped out of

the experiment was replaced by another subject with sim ilar

SHCS-Adult characteristics; the replacement subject went through the

entire experimental process.

Procedure

Prior to the in itia tio n of the actual experimental process a

34

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission
p ilo t study was conducted with four subjects. The purpose of the

p ilo t study was to help fam iliarize the experimenter with the

experimental procedure. I t also allowed fo r s k ill development in the

hypnotic techniques specific to this experiment. (Appendix A)

Volunteers fo r the actual experiment were chosen from among

those who responded to printed requests (Appendix B) fo r subjects;

the requests were posted and handed to prospective subjects. The

subjects then signed an informed consent (Appendix C) and were given

an in it ia l screening with the SHCS-Adult.

There were five items on the SHCS-Adult, hence fiv e was the

highest score obtainable and zero the lowest. The age regression

item consisted of a l i s t of fiv e statements with the statement that

best described th e ir experience endorsed by the subject. The series

of statements on the age regression item ranged from an experience of

no regression (one) to an experience of complete return to either the

th ird , fourth, or f if t h grade (fiv e ); for purposes of quantification

a score of four or fiv e on this item and the hypnotist's subjective

rating determined whether the subject passed the item.

Assignment to experimental groups was based on SHCS-Adult

scores. Six subjects who passed at least three SHCS-Adult scores and

obtained a score of at least four on the age regression item were

assigned to the age regression/experimental group. Subjects were

included in this group i f they selected a five or wavered between

selecting a four or a five on the age regression item or gave

subjective indications of age regressibility such as a clearly

childlike tone of voice and answering questions with a child's

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
vocabulary as well as giving, during the screening, a vivid

description of these a c tiv itie s when age regressed. One subject who

was in it ia ll y included in the age regression group, but who during

the experimental session did not experience age regression was

excluded from the study. This subject was dropped from the

experiment without the test protocol having been seen or scored by

the experimenter.

Another 12 subjects who passed at least three of the SHCS-Adult

items were assigned to the deep hypnosis or hypnotic simulator

control groups at random, six to each group. Subjects in these

groups gave fewer subjective indications of having been age regressed

during the screening. The minimum susceptibility group was made up

of six subjects who passed no more than one of the SCHS-Adult items.

A fter the subjects were placed into experimental or control

groups, waking state Rorschach testing was counterbalanced fo r each

group by having three subjects from each group take the Rorschach

before the age regressed, deep hypnosis or simulated session

Rorschach, and three subjects took th e ir waking Rorschach a fte r the

age regressed, deep hypnosis or simulation Rorschach session.

Subjects in the age regression or experimental group and in the deep

hypnosis control group who received th e ir in itia l Rorschach in the

waking state were given suggestions to become amnesic fo r th e ir

in it ia l Rorschach administration when la te r hypnotized.

Subjects in the age regression and deep trance groups were seen

fo r three sessions to work on deepening trance fo r the deep hypnosis

control group and becoming age regressed fo r the age regression or

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
experimental group. Subjects in both groups learned to keep th eir

eyes open without interfering with th e ir trance state. Subjects in

these groups 'who could not obtain this c rite ria were to have been

discontinued from the experiment and replaced with a sim ilar subject.

Trance group subjects (age regression and deep hypnosis groups)

were hypnotized and trance deepened through the use of personalized

techniques. Subjects in the age regression group were age regressed

through a confusional technique that b u ilt upon truisms and focused

on the ablation of experiences that occurred a fte r the target age of

fiv e . The age five was chosen because the norms for this age were

most discrepant with adult norms. (Exner, Weiner & Schuyler, 1976 &

Exner, 1978)

In view of the discussion concerning the training of simulators

(page 30), the other two control groups, the hypnotically susceptible

(pass three or more SHCS-Adult items) and minimally susceptible (pass

one or less at the SHCS-Adult items) groups were not given any prior

training before the simulation session. After in it ia l screening or

the in it ia l Rorschach at least two days passed before the

experimental session.

For the subjects in the four groups who took the waking

Rorschach a fte r the age regression, experimental deep hypnosis or

simulation session Rorschach, two days passed before the last

Rorschach was administered. This made the time of testing consistent

with those subjects taking the waking Rorschach before the

experimental Rorschach.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
All of the Rorschachs were administered by a second experimenter

blind to the experiment. During the session when the Rorschach was

administered while the subject was age regressed, in deep hypnosis,

or simulating instructions given differed in order to be consistent

with the respective condition. It was explained to the second

experimenter that some subjects w ill be hypnotized, some w ill not.

The second experimenter was trained in the Exner (1974) method of

administering the Rorschach. Despite train ing , some deviations in

technique were noted, but because this examiner did a ll the testing,

any errors were randomly distributed.

For the age regression group, afte r hypnotic induction and age

regression had been established, attention was given to whom the

subject might indicate the experimenter to be, otherwise the

experimenter introduced himself as the subject's kindergarten

teacher, prin cip al, or friendly adult. Suggestions were given that

the subject was in a room in his elementary school and f e l t quite at

ease with the person doing the testing, who then entered and

administered the Rorschach.

The deep hypnosis group was deeply hypnotized and told to remain

hypnotized while a te st was administered to them and suggestions were

made as to current person, place and time. The examiner entered and

administered the Rorschach. The experimenter remained in the room

while the Rorschachs were given and brought the subjects out of

trance a fte r testing.

The hypnotizable simulator and minimally susceptible control

groups received the following instructions in the simulation session:

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
39

You are not to go into trance. You are not to be


hypnotized today. But I want you to~act and behave'
lik e you would i f you were fiv e years old. You w ill
not be five years old. You w ill be the age you are
now, but I want you to behave and think lik e a fiv e -
year-old would think and behave.

After experimentation was completed each subject was debriefed

(Appendix D) and the nature of the experiment explained to them.

Provisions were made for follow-up care in the unlikely event of any

distress attributed to hypnosis or the experimental procedure

(Appendix E).

Overall, the experimental design was sim ilar to the separate

sample pretest posttest control group design as defined by Campbell

and Stanley (1966). In each group half the subjects received a

pretest, half a posttest, thus counterbalancing the design. A'flow

chart of the experimental design and procedure was presented in

Figure 1.

The design employed was expected to control many of the threats

to internal v a lid ity identified by Campbell and Stanley (1966). Such

threats to internal v a lid ity as history, testing, selection and

regression were regarded as controlled by this design. Other threats

such as maturation, instrumentation, m ortality, and interactions were

also controlled but were not deemed as significant threats because of

the nature of the experiment.

Employing a second experimenter, blind to the experiment, to

administer the Rorschachs kept the experimenter out of the data

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
collection process and was a step toward meeting the recommendations

for researchers made by Barber (1976). The experimenter scored the

Rorschachs as did one other individual trained in the Exner

Comprehensive System (1974) and who was blind to the research. While

the second scorer was blind to the nature of the research, he was

erroneously given a set of protocols with handwritten notation that

indicated whether they were done in the pre/post or experimental

condition. However, he was unable to decipher a ll of the notations,

and stated that he was unaware of the nature of the experiment.

After the experimenter and second scorer had scored the

protocols independently, a percentage of agreement in scoring was

calculated. Discrepancies in scoring were then arbitrated in person

and by telephone until agreement was reached on a ll scores.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Volunteers Given
Stanford Hypnotic C lin ical Scale - Adult
______________ (SHCS-Adult)_______________
I
Subjects Subjects
th at pass passing one
three of fiv e SHCS- or no SHCS-
adult items adult items

Age Regression Deep Hypnctizable Minimally


r
Group (A) Hypnosis Simulator Susceptible
Score 4 or 5 Group Group Group
on SHCS-Adult (B) (C) (D)
age regression
from

*1 A2 B1 B2 C1 C2 D1 U2
taking Nothing Waking Nothing Waking Nothing Waking Nothing
state state state state
Rorschach Rorschach Rorschach Rorschac!

Ax & A2 & B2 c1 & c2 D1 S D 2


Practice Practice Nothing Nothing
Age Deep
Regression Hypnosis
three to fiv e three to
sessions fiv e sessions
i" 1 r ~ ~ 4 i i ♦
& d2
Aj & A2 B1 & B2
^1* ^2* ^1*
Rorschach Rorschach Roschach given with
given in age given in deep instructions to simulate
regressed state hypnosis being age fiv e

b2
*1 A2 B1 C1 C2 D1 D2
Nothing Waking Nothing Waking Nothing Waking Nothing Waking
state state state state
Rorschach Rorschach Rorschach Rorschach
1
... 1 j i
Debriefing
*

Figure 1. Flowchart of Experimental Design and Procedure

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Data Analysis

In having reviewed ways in which the data could have been

analyzed several issues emerged. F irs t, in reviewing the Exner

(1978; Exner, Weiner & Schuyler, 1976) age norms i t became evident

th a t, even when comparing the adult norms with those fo r the

5-year-old, nearly a ll of the confidence intervals established by

going two standard deviations below the adult mean and two standard

deviations above the child meanoverlapped.Thus, differences

between age regressed and adult waking state Rorschachs might be

minimal even i f the subjects were genuinely regressed. Compounding

this d iffic u lty was the likelihood of intrasubject factors. As

indicated by the p ilo t study (Appendix A) one subject was two

standard deviations above the adult norms for the number of waking

state responses, and also two standard deviations above the age 5

norms for the number of responses given while age regressed. This

finding could be regarded as consistent with the subjects

psychodynamics, but i t raised havoc in the data when added with the

scores obtained by other subjects to establish a group mean.

Because of the sample distributions between expected adult

Rorschach performance and the expected performance of children age

fiv e , parametric tests may not always establish valid differences

between the waking state and subjects who were regressed, in deep

hypnosis or simulating; and between age regressed, deeply hypnotized,

and simulating subjects. Nonparametric measures such as the sign

test could determine whether the findings show the data headed in

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
the expected directions or not. In the P ilo t Study (Appendix A) the

jt-te s t revealed a few significant differences between waking and

regressed Rorschach performance, but the Sign Test showed the data

fo r the waking and age regressed states headed in the direction

predicted by the Exner (1978; Exner, Weiner & Schuyler, 1976) age

norms.

The data was evaluated fo r significant differences between the

waking state and age regression, deep hypnosis or simulation; and

between age regressed, deeply hypnotized and simulating subjects.

But because such an analysis may not have detected some valid

differences other tests were to be done in order to establish whether

the data was in the direction predicted by the Exner (1978; Exner,

Weiner & Schuyler, 1976) age norms.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
CHAPTER I I I

RESULTS

A summary of each subject's score on the Stanford Hypnotic Clinical

Scale fo r Adults (SHCS-Adult) is presented. For purposes of comparison,

both the overall score fo r items passed and the specific score on the

age regression item are presented.

Group I , the Age Regression Experimental group, consists of six

subjects who obtained either four or five passes on the SHCS-Adult and

passed the age regression item (Appendix F). Two subjects dropped out

of the experiment because they found the age regression procedure

distressing, follow-up on those subjects suggests they experienced only

minimal distress that abated a fte r dropping out of the exeriment

(Appendix G). The Deep Hypnosis Control Group and Group I I I , the

Hypnotizable Simulator Control Group, contain subjects passing from

three to fiv e items on the SHCS-Adult. Their scores on the age

regression item range from two to four, with the six subjectsobtaining

a four on this item having wavered between a three or a four and give

fewer subjective indications of having been age regressed. The subjects

in Group IV, Minimally Susceptible Simulators, a ll passed either one or

none of the SHCS-Adult items and none of them passed the age regression

i tern.

Table 1 gives a summary of the group totals and means for the four

groups on the SHCS-Adult and fo r the age regression item on that scale.

44

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
45
Table 1

Group Totals and Means fo r the Four Groups on the SHCS-Adult and Age
Regression Item

SHCS-Adult SHCS-Adult Age Regres- Age Regres-


Total Mean sion Item sion Item
Total Mean

Group I Age Regression 28 4.67 27 4.50


Group I I Deep Hypnosis 23 3.83 20 3.33
Group I I I Hypnotizable 23 3.83 20 3.33
Simulators
Group IV Minimally 4 .67 15 2.50
Susceptible Simulators

Table 2 presents the results of a One-Way Analysis of Variance

to test fo r significant differences among the four groups.

Table 2

One-Way Analysis of Variance Testing Differences on the Stanford


Hypnotic Clinical Scale-Adult Results fo r the Four Experimental
Groups

Source DF Mean £
Squares

Between Groups 3 18.73 44.60*


Within Groups 20_ .42
23
* £ < .0 1

A review of the One-Way Analysis of Variance presented in Table 2

finds the Stanford Hypnotic Clinical Scale-Adult (SHCS-Adult) results for

the four groups differing significantly (£ < .01). However, a posthoc

Tukey test revealed a c ritic a l ratio of 1.03 at the .05 level of

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
significance, which means that while Group IV , the minimally susceptible

simulators, differed significantly from the other groups, the age

regression group, the deep hypnosis group, and the hypnotic simulator group

did not d iffe r significantly in SHCS-Adult scores on hypnotizability (Table

1 ).
Table 3 presents the results of a One-Way Analysis of Variance which

tested the differences between mean scores on the age regression item.

Table 3

One-Way Analysis of Variance Testing Differences Between the Four


Experimental Groups on the Age Regression Item of the Stanford Hypnotic
Clinical Scale fo r Adults (SHCS-Adult)

DF Mean F
Squares

Between Groups 3 4.72 12.42*


Within Groups 20 .38
23
* £ < .0 1

In reviewing the results of Table 3, i t is found that the groups do

vary sig n ifican tly, (p < . 0 1 ) , when comparing SHCS-Adult scores on the age

regression item. A posthoc Tukey test revealed a c ritic a l ratio of .95 at

the .05 level to establish differences between group means. With this

ra tio , a significant difference is found between Group I, the age

regression experimental and the minimally susceptible simulators, but not

between the deep hypnosis or hypnotizable simulators and the minimally

susceptible simulators (Table 1).

The percentage of agreement between the experimenter's and second

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
47
scorers in it ia l independent scoring was calculated by the following

formula:

Number of scoring Number of scoring


categories used by + categories used by - Discrepancies
experimenter additional scorer
= Percentage
Agreement
Number of scoring Number of scoring
categories used by + categories used by
experimenter additional scorer

The results of the calculations on percentage agreement between

experimenter and additional scorer are presented in Table 4.

Table 4

Percentage Agreement on In itia l Independent Scoring for Experimenter and


Additional Scorer

Grand total percentage agreement for a ll tests = 86% (£=24 }


Grand total percentage agreement for a ll waking state testing = 85% (n=24)
Grand total percentage agreement for a ll waking state pretesting = 85%
(Of 12)
Grand total percentage agreement for a ll waking state posttesting = 85%
(n=12)
GraricT total percentage agreement for a ll experimental condition testing =
86% (£=24)
Grand total percentage agreement fo r a ll experimental testing done with
subjects who had preexperimental pretesting = 86% (£=12)
Grand total percentage agreement fo r a ll experimental testing done with
subjects who then had postexperimental testing = 86% (£=12)

Group I

Waking State £ Experimental £

pre 87% 3 84% 3


post 85% 3 88% 3
total 86 % 6 87% 6

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Group I I

Waking State £ Experimental £

pre 83% 3 86% 3


post 88% 3 81% 3
total 83% 6 84% 6

Group I I I

Waking State £ Experimental £

pre 86% 3 90% 3


post 86% 3 88% 3
total 86% 6 89% 6

Group IV

Waking State £ Experimental £

pre 85% 3 84% 3


post 80% 3 84% 3
total M% ’S m nr

From Table 4 i t can be seen that the percent of agreement in scores

fo r the experimenter and additional scorer was 80 percent or above for a ll

groups and grand to tals. The percentage of agreement for each subject and

each response is available in Appendix H.

Table 5 presents the waking state group means on the Rorschach

variables for a ll subjects (Pre and Post combined, n=6 per group). The

Sequence of Scores and Structural Summary for each subject appears in

Appendix I and the age norms for adults (Exner, 1978) as well as the age

norms for children (Note 1) appear in Appendix J for purposes of comparison.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
49
Table 5

Waking State Group Means fo r a ll Subjects

Minimally
Rorschach Age Deep Hypnotizable Susceptible
Variables Regression Hypnosis Simulators Simulators

M SD M SD M SD M SD

R 18.83 10.25 20.33 8.76 18.67 9.50 20.00 10.73


Location
Features
W 3.83 2.32 6.67 2.88 6.50 3.08 9.33 2.50
D 11.17 6.40 11.67 9.77 10.33 6.15 8.83 6.27
Dd 3.67 5.20 2.00 1.41 1.83 1.94 1.83 2.14
S 2.33 3.93 2.83 3.55 .67 1.03 1.83 2.14
Dw .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00
DQ+ 2.17 2.23 2.67 1.97 4.00 2.28 4.83 5.35
DQo 15.67 10.25 15.67 8.94 12.67 5.47 13.17 8.23
DQ- .33 .51 .50 .55 .50 .55 .17 .41
Determinants
M 2.50 1.38 3.00 1.67 4.50 2.74 2.83 2.14
FM 2.17 1.33 2.50 2.35 2.50 1.38 3.83 3.55
m 1.00 .89 .33 .52 1.83 1.47 .83 1.33
C+Cn .17 .17 .00 .00 .33 .82 .00 .00
Sum C 1.17 1.17 1.00 1.10 2.33 1.97 2.50 1.87
Sum C‘ .00 .00 .17 .41 .17 .41 .83 .98
Sum Y .33 .52 1.50 2.35 .00 .00 1.17 1.94
Sum V .33 .52 .50 .55 .33 .52 .17 .41
Sum T .50 .84 .67 .82 .33 .82 .33 .52
Sum
Shading 1.17 1.29 2.83 3.87 .83 .82 2.00 2.77
FD .17 .41 .33 .52 .00 .00 .33 .52
F 10.50 6.63 12.17 7.31 8.33 5.40 8.83 5.46
FQX+ .50 .84 .33 .52 .67 .52 .17 .41
FQXo 15.50 8.46 15.00 6.45 13.83 6.82 16.17 9.45
FQXw 2.00 1.79 3.67 3.27 3.67 3.14 3.50 2.17
FQX- .50 .55 1.17 1.47 .50 .55 .33 .52
No Form .17 .41 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00
P 4.83 .75 4.33 2.25 5.17 1.72 5.50 2.66
Zf 6.17 2.32 9.17 2.41 8.83 4.12 12.83 5.74
Blends 1.00 .89 1.83 1.33 2.67 2.07 3.00 2.83
(2) 7.17 4.54 5.83 3.19 7.67 2.88 5.67 4.41
Pure H 2.33 .82 2.50 1.52 4.17 2.48 2.33 2.25
Fd .17 .41 .17 .41 .00 .00 .00 .00

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
50
Rorschach Age Deep H y p n o tiza b le M in im a lly
V a ria b le s R egression Hypnosis S im u la to rs S u s c e p tib le
S im u la to rs

M SD M SD M SD M SD

Ratios &
Deriva­
tions
Lambda 1.46 1.01 1.55 .82 1.28 1.60 1.09 1.13
X+% .85 .05 .77 .10 .78 .11 .80 .16
F+% .62 .33 .57 .28 .70 .13 .73 .18
A% .53 .09 .74 .73 .49 .13 .52 .13
Afr .61 .16 .47 .14 .51 .19 .44 .16
3r+(2)/R .41 .07 .40 .19 .73 .50 .50 .13
H+Hd 3.50 2.74 4.83 1.72 5.50 2.88 2.67 2.81
EA 3.33 1.89 3.75 2.16 6.33 4.00 4.42 7.17
ep 4.33 1.97 5.67 1.02 5.17 3.31 7.17 6.11
Special
Scores
FABCOM .17 .41 .00 .00 .17 .41 .33 .52
INCOM .33 .52 .33 .52 .83 .75 .50 .84
ALOG .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00
CONTAM .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00
CP .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00
MOR .17 .41 .00 .00 .33 .82 .17 .41
PER .00 .00 .17 .41 .17 .41 .17 .41
PSV .00 .00 .17 .41 .17 .41 .17 .41
DV .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00
Total .67 .52 .67 .82 1.83 1.47 .83 1.17

Table 6 presents the experimental condition group means on the

Rorschach variables for a ll subjects (Pre and Post combined, n=6 per

group).

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
T ab le 6

Experimental Condition Group Means for a ll Subjects

Minimally
Rorschach Age Deep Hypnotizable Susceptible
Variables Regression Hypnosis Simulators Simulators

M SD M SD M SD M SD

R 18.50 8.96 18.83 8.33 17.17 3.97 15.67 6.25


Locati on
Features
U 4.83 1.94 6.83 2.79 6.83 2.71 6.67 2.34
D 10.33 6.83 9.50 5.09 9.50 4.28 7.33 4.32
Dd 3.33 2.58 3.17 2.14 .83 .75 1.67 1.21
S .83 .98 3.67 4.32 .33 .82 1.17 .75
Dw .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00
DQ+ 3.17 2.04 3.00 2.10 3.17 2.79 4.17 2.14
DQo 13.50 .96 14.67 8.60 12.33 4.27 10.50 4.93
DQ- .83 .98 .67 1.21 .50 1.23 .33 .82
Determinants
M 2.33 1.75 2.67 1.86 3.33 1.37 3.67 1.47
FM 3.50 2.43 1.50 1.05 2.00 1.41 2.67 2.34
m 1.00 .89 .17 .41 .50 .84 1.67 1.63
C+Cn .17 .17 .17 .41 .50 .84 .17 .41
Sum C 3.00 1.27 1.00 1.55 2.67 2.06 3.67 1.75
Sum C' 1.00 1.55 .50 .55 1.17 .98 .67 .82
Sum Y .17 .41 .67 .82 1.00 1.55 .50 .55
Sum V .00 .00 .50 .84 .00 .00 .17 .41
Sum T .67 1.21 .17 .41 .50 .55 .17 .41
Sum
Shading 1.83 2.65 1.83 2.00 2.67 3.61 1.50 1.73
FD .50 1.23 .33 .52 .17 .41 .00 .00
F 8.17 5.50 11.50 7.97 7.50 4.85 5.83 4.22
FQX+ .17 .41 .33 .52 .50 .55 .83 1.60
FQXo 13.50 10.46 13.83- 4.92 12.33 2.50 11.50 1.62
FQXw 3.50 2.43 4.00 ' 3.90 3.50 2.81 3.00 2.10
FQX- 1.33 1.21 .67 1.21 .50 1.23 .33 .82
P 3.17 1.33 5.50 1.52 5.00 1.79 4.17 1.94
Zf 7.17 3.71 10.00 3.74 9.33 2.73 9.33 4.63
B1ends 1.83 1.33 .83 2.04 2.50 1.64 2.67 1.37
(2) 8.83 5.49 4.83 2.71 6.67 3.27 5.33 2.42
Pure H 1.83 1.17 2.50 1.87 2.50 1.38 2.00 1.27
Fd .50 1.23 .17 .41 .83 .75 .00 .00

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
52
Rorschach Age Deep H y p n o tiza b le M in im a lly
V a ria b le s Regression Hypnosis S im u la to rs S u s c e p tib le
S im u la to rs

M SD M SD M SD M SD

No Form .00 .00 .00 .00 .33 .82 .00 .00


Ratios &
Deriva­
tions
Lambda .77 .30 2.53 3.47 .89 .67 .61 .36
X+% .68 .19 .77 .07 .77 .15 .80 .04
F+% .60 .33 .73 .11 .80 .36 .74 .16
A% .53 .12 .46 .06 .53 .04 .50 .12
Afr .54 .17 .49 .10 .52 .23 .47 .10
3r+(2)/R .51 .24 .35 .20 .60 .27 .40 .12
H+Hd 2.50 1.38 4.00 1.55 3.33 1.21 2.17 1.47
EA 4.33 1.34 3.33 2.32 5.58 2.22 5.75 2.44
ep 6.33 3.88 3.50 1.87 5.17 1.94 5.83 2.86
Special
Scores
FABCOM .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .33 .52
INCOM .33 .52 .83 1.17 .50 .84 .33 .52
ALOG .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .33 .52
CONTAM .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00
CP .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00
MOR .83 .98 .00 .00 .00 .00 .50 .55
PER 1.17 1.60 .17 .41 .67 1.03 .67 .82
PSV .33 .82 .33 .52 .17 .41 .17 .41
DV .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00
Total 2.83 2.40 1.33 1.03 1.33 1.75 2.33 1.51

An Analysis of Variance based on change scores obtained by getting

the absolute difference between waking and experimental condition

Rorschach scores for each group was done. Comparisons were made for the

total groups (n=6, per group) and fo r those subjects who took a

preexperimental Rorschach (n=3, per group) and a postexperimental

Rorschach (n=3, per group). The results indicated seven significant

differences in 153 tests, an outcome that is not different from chance

alone. When posthoc tests were done on the seven significant

differences, one showed the Age Regression group to d iffe r significantly

from the others.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
In Table 7 a comparison is made of selected Rorschach variables and

the mean of each group's correspondence to the children's age norms.

The variables were sleeted because they show the most pronounced

differences between the adult norms and the children's norms fo r age

fiv e (Exner, 1978, Note 1 ). Cut-off scores were developed for Rorschach

variables D, S, m, FC and FD by scoring as childlike any score two

standard deviations below the adult age norm but within the confidence

interval based on the age fiv e children's mean and standard deviation.

The cutoff scores fo r ALOG, INCOM, DV, PER, Fd and C+Cn used the same

procedure as above but setting the c ritic a l point above the adult mean

because the la tte r scores are expected to be higher fo r children than

adults. For EA:ep and FC:CF+C the c ritic a l direction was obtained by

scoring as childlike those ratios obtained by 90% or more of the age

five sample.

Table 7

Mean Group Correspondence to Children's Age Norms During Experimental


Condition

Rorschach C ritical Age Deep Hypnotizable Minimally


Variables Point Regres­ Hypnosis Simulator Susceptible
sion Simulator

M S M S M S M S

D 4.10 10.33 0 9.50 0 9.50 0 7.33 0


S .91 .83 + 3.67 0 .33 + 1.17 0
m .30 1.00 0 .17 + .50 0 1.67 0
FC 1.16 2.17 0 .83 + 1.33 0 2.33 0
FD .78 .00 + .33 + .17 + .00 +
ALOG .20 .00 0 .00 0 .00 0 .33 +
INCOM .32 .33 + .83 + .50 + .33 +

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
54
Rorschach C r it ic a l Age Deep H y p n o tiza b le M in im a lly
V a ria b le s P o in t R egres- Hypnosis S im u la to r S u s c e p tib le
sio n S im u la to r

M S M S M S M S

DV .20 .00 0 .00 0 .00 0 .00 0


PER 1.37 1.17 0 .17 0 .67 0 .67 0
Fd .90 .50 0 .17 0 .83 0 .00 0
C+Cn .60 .17 0 .17 0 .50 0 .17 0
A* .54 .53 0 .46 0 .53 0 .50 0
EA 4.33 + 3.33 + 5.58 0 5.75 +
ep EA<ep 6.33 3.50 5.17 5.83
FC 2.17 0 .83 0 1.33 0 2.33 0
CF+C FC<CF+C .83 .17 1.33 1.33

Total 4 4 3 4
% Correspondence 29% 29% 21% • 29%
Note S = Score
+ = corresponds to children's age norm
0 = does not correspond to children's age norm

In reviewing Table 7 it is noted that one group had 21%

correspondence to the children's age norms, while the other groups had

29%.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
CHAPTER IV

CONCLUSIONS AND DISCUSSION

The f i r s t null hypotheses, that there w ill be no difference on

Rorschach scores between hypnotically age regressed subjects, minimally

susceptible simulators, hypnotizable simulators and deeply hypnotized

subjects could not be rejected. The results of the analysis of variance

based on change scores between waking and experimental conditions showed

seven significant differences in 153 analyses, with only one of the

seven differences showing the age regression group to d iffe r

significantly from the other groups on posthoc testing. When the

Rorschach variables defined as most important (see page 32) are

considered, they do not show the age regression group to d iffe r

significantly from the other groups. The results were obtained when the

groups were separated for order of testing (pre or post, n=3 per group)

or when the data was pooled (n=6 per group).

The small sample size in each group (n=6) and pre or post subgroup

(n=3) provides a low level of s ta tis tic a l power fo r detecting any

significant differences that might exist. The results do not show

marked differences between the age regression and other groups as might

be expected i f age regression were a state that allows recovery of

childlike functioning, but the small sample size may not allow

s ta tis tic a l differences that might become evident with more subjects.

The second null hypothesis, that Rorschach scores fo r the

Experimental (Age Regression) group, w ill not show more correspondence

55

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
age norms than w ill the Rorschach scores fo r the control groups (Deep

Hypnosis, Hypnotizable Simulator and Minimally Susceptible Simulator,

could not be rejected. The results from comparing the total mean (n=6)

with c ritic a l scores developed fo r Rorschach variables having age fiv e

means that d iffe r from the adult mean by two standard deviations or are

found in at least 90% of the children's sample, did not show the

age regression group means to be more childlike than those for any other

group. None of the groups showed more than 4 out of 14 (29%) selected

Rorschach variables corresponding to the children's norms, with the age

regression group faring as well as any of the other groups, but not

exceeding them in correspondence to children's norms.

While small sample size could be a factor here, i t is less lik ely

because inferential s ta tis tic s were not used and the question was

whether a group's mean score on selected Rorschachs variables

corresponded more with children's norms than did the scores of another

group. The results do not show sufficient differences between the age

regression group and the three control groups in correspondence to

children's age norms.

Based on the results, one might conclude that when six hypnotically

age regressed subjects are compared with six subjects each in deep

hypnosis, hypnotizable simulator and minimally susceptible groups, with

a criterion age of fiv e , i t is unlikely that significant differences

w ill be seen between the groups. Further, when Rorschach variables are

selected fo r th e ir discrepancy between adult and age five norms, the age

regression group w ill not show a greater correspondence to the age norms

with only a few Rorschach variables fo r any of the groups showing a

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
57
correspondence to children's age norms. This finding suggests a

possibility of a mixture of adult and childlike functioning fo r subjects

in th e ir respective experimental conditions.

The present findings can be meaningfully compared with the Staples

and Wilensky (1968) study because the target age for regression was six

and because some s im ila ritie s exist in Rorschach scoring methods. In

the previous study one overall developmental score was obtained based on

location scores and determinants, that developmental level score was

actually a precursor to the Exner (1974) system. However, Exner

separates his scoring into developmental quality fo r location scores and

form level of determinants, yielding eight scores instead of the one

summary score used by Staples and Wilensky (1968). While an exact

comparison of the two studies is not possible, the outcome was sim ilar

to that of the current study in the respect that a significant

difference was not found between th e ir six age regressed subjects and

three simulating controls. However, the Staples and Wilensky (1968)

study also had a low level of s ta tis tic a l power for detecting

significant differences because of the small number of subjects.

The results of the other experimental hypnotic age regression,

using the Rorschach as the dependent variable, Solomon and Gordson

(1971) are d iffic u lt to compare with the current study. In the (Solomon

& Goodson, 1971) study comparisons between age regressed and Rorschachs

previously produced by the subjects when they were the criterion age,

with the criterion age being in the teens. Nevertheless, with regard to

the hypotheses of the present study, the outcome of the Solomon and

Gordson (1971) study was sim ilar in that the six experimental and seven

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
58
control subjects did not d iffe r significantly when the age regressed and

simulated conditions were compared.

The inclusion of a deep hypnosis group in the present study allows

fo r a further test of the finding by Hodge and Wagner (1969) where one

subject's Rorschach indicated more childlike functioning as trance was

deepened. While this doesn't rule out the subject having slipped into

an age regressed state, that likelihood could at best be conjecture at

this point. The current study found no significant difference between a

hypnotically age regressed group and a group of deeply hypnotized

subjects; but no significant differences were noted with groups of

hypnotizable or minimally susceptible simulators. Other studies

(Bergman, Graham and Leavitt, 1947; Kier, 1945; Moore and Gibson, 1950;

Norgab, in LeCron e d ., 1952) are more limited in comparability because

of the use of only one subject or not having a control group. Orne

(1951) used 10 subjects and compared waking state Rorschachs and other

tests with the same measures being used when the subject was age

regressed. Deep personality changes were reflected but mixed with adult

lik e functioning; because of the lack of a control group that study

would best be compared with the P ilo t study (Appendix A).

When considering the results of the current study in relation to

the results of previous studies, sim ilarities are found in that when

less than ten subjects per experimental and control group are used, i t

is unlikely that significant differences on Rorschach scores w ill be

seen between groups of hypnotically age regressed, deeply hypnotized,

hypnotizable simulator, and minimally susceptible simulator subjects.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
The results of this study could be taken as support fo r the

position that hypnosis is best described as role playing. However, the

data do not necessarily indicate that the experimental age regressed

subjects were not in a state of age regression, but that th e ir

performance on the Rorschach during that time was not significantly

d ifferen t from simulating and deeply hypnotized subjects. The lack of

significant differences could be because age regression, while genuine,

may be a mixture of adult and child behaviors, as suggested by Hilgard

(1968). I f that were the case then s ta tis tic a l differences might be

obscured by the combination of adult and child functioning as reflected

on the Rorschach. During the study one subject described herself as

feeling as i f she were going through a mirror or window to return to age

five when age regressing, and that some of her stayed on the other side

(her adult age) when she was age regressed. This subject's experience

seems to describe how one may feel when returning to a younger age, but

s t i l l retain an adult observing ego.

A point to consider in evaluating the outcome of this study is that

there appears to be no objective way to evaluate the depth of age

regression. For the purposes of this study, inclusion in the

experimental group was based on the subject's score on the Stanford

Hypnotic Clinical Scale-Adult (SHCS-Adult). Passing the age regression

item is based on the subject's report of having returned to an e a rlie r

age. Of the subjects in the age regression group, three cut of six

(Appendix F) obtained a score of four on the age regression item, a

passing score, but one that only requires the subjects to feel in part as

though they were reliving an experience but s t i l l remember that they are

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
60
th e ir present age. Thus, some of the subjects may have been only

p a rtia lly or pseudoregressed.

One factor that is d iffic u lt to account fo r in quantitative

research is the experiences of the subjects. One interesting comparison

is between the reports of a simulating subject and an age regressed

counterpart. Thesimulating subject, a pediatric nurse sensitive to

children, talked about experiencing a "rocketship" she saw during her

simulatingsession Rorschach as the Space Shuttle Columbia, an

experience discrepant with the functioning of a five year old. In

contrast, an age regressed subject reported seeing "African natives lik e

on George Pierrot" and that "My daddy watches that a ll the time." The

television program reported by the la tte r subject has not been aired

since the early 1960's , and thus, was consistent with being age

regressed. Thus, subtle contextural cues which are d iffic u lt to

quantify, can be useful in assessing more authentic simulating or

genuine age regression.

Future experimenters would do well to include more subjects in each

experimental group in order to reach a level of s ta tis tica l power that

would detect a significant difference i f one were to exist. Such a

design might well include two experimenters doing the hypnosis, with

each doing ah equal number of subjects in the experimental and each

control group. The experimenters doing the testing should be blind to

the research and test on equal number of subjects in each group.

Id eally, the testers should be experienced with the Rorschach as

administered in the Exner Comprehensive System (1974).

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
The age norms developed by Exner (1978, Note 1) have proven very

useful in providing established points to which data can be compared.

The norms provide some lin k to previous research (Staples and Wilensky,

1968 & Soloman and Goodson, 1971) and w ill most lik e ly be updated and

extended in the future. While the norms often show overlapping

confidence intervals between children and adult means, this appears to

be an accurate population estimate and needs to be kept in mind by

future researchers.

In the fin a l analysis there is meager experimental evidence for the

existence o f hypnotic age regression. However, i t w ill continue to be

used by clinicians who find i t to be useful. Therefore, continued

investigation is indicated to provide a more complete understanding.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Reference Notes

1. Exner, J. E. The Rorschach: a comprehensive system , vol. I I I .


p rin t.

2. Exner, J. E. Rorschach Workshops Alumni Newsletter, 1980.

3. Exner, J. E. Rorschach Workshops Alumni Newsletter, 1981.

4. Exner, J. E. Personal Communication, July 2, 1982.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
REFERENCES

As A. The Recovery o f Forgotten Language Through Hypnotic Age


Regression: A case report. The American Journal, of Clinical
Hypnosis. 1962,5^, 24-29.

Barber, T. X. Hypnotic Age Regression: A c ritic a l review;


Psychosomatic Medicine. 1962, 24, 286-299.

Barber, T. X. P itfa lls in human research: ten pivotal points. New


York: Pergamon Press Inc. 1976.

Barber, T. X. & Glass, C. B. Significant Factors in Hypnotic Behavior.


Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology. 1962, 64, 222-228.

Beck, S. J ., Beck, A. G ., L e v itt, E. E ., & Molish, H. B. Rorschach's


te s t vol I : basic processes (3rd, e d .). New York: Grune and
Stratton, 1961.

Best, H. L ., & Micheals, R. M. Living out "Future" Experience under


Hypnosis. Science. 1954, 120, 1077.

Bergman, M. S ., Graham, H ., & L eavitt, H. C. Rorschach Exploration of


Consecutive Chronological Age Regressions. Psychosomatic Medicine.
1947, 2, 20-29.

Campbell, D. T ., & Stanley,. J. C. Experimental and quasi-experimental


designs fo r research. Chicago: Rand McNally College Publishing
Co., 1966.

Crasilneck, H. B ., & Micheal, C. M. Performance on the Bender under


Hypnotic Age Regression. Journal of Abnormal and Social
Psychology. 1957, 54, 319-322.

Davis, L. W. & Husbund, R. W. Study of Hypnotic Susceptibility in


Relation to Personality T raits. Journal of Abnormal and Social
Psychology. 1931, 26, 172-182.

Dolin, A. 0. An Attempt at a Physiological Analysis of the Elements of


Individual Personality Experience. The Johns Hopkins University
Applied Physics Laboratory Library Bulletin (Translation Series)*
Report No. TG-236-T-159, 1960. Translation from Arkiv
Biologicheskihh Nakk. 1934, 3£, 25-52.

Edmonston, W. E. An Experimental Investigation of Hypnotic Age


Regression. The American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis. 1961, J ,
127-138.

Erickson , M.H. & Kubie, L. S. The Successful Treatment of a Case of


Hysterical Depression by a Return Under Hypnosis to a C ritical Phase
of Childhood. Psychoanalytic Quarterly. 1941, JO, 582-609.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Erickson, M. H ., Rossi, E. L. & Rossi, S. I . Hypnotic re a litie s : the
induction of clin ic a l hypnosis and forms of indirect suggestion. New
York: Irvington, 1976.

Erickson, M. H. & Rossi, E.L. Hypnotherapy: an exploratory casebook.


New York: Irvington Publishers, 1979.

Erickson, M. H ., & Rossi, E. L. Experiencing hypnosis, therapeutic


approaches to altered states. New York: Irvington Publishers,
1981.
Exner, J. E. The Rorschach: a comprehensive system. New York: John
Wiley and Sons, 1974.

Exner, J. E. The Rorschach: a comprehensive system, vol. I I : current


research and advanced interpretation. New York: John Wiley and Sons,
1978.

Exner, J. E.; Weiner, I . B. & Schuyler, W. A Rorschach handbook for


the comprehensive system. Bayview, New York: Rorschach Workshops,
1976.

Ford, G. F ., & Yeager, C. L. Changes in the Electroencephalogram in


Subjects under Hypnosis. Disorders of the Nervous System. 1948, _9,
190-192.

Friedlander, J. W., & Sarbin, T. R. The Depth of Hypnosis. Journal of


Abnormal and Social Psychology. 1938, 33, 453-475.

Fromm, E ., & Shor, R. E. (eds.). Hypnosis: research developments and


perspectives. Chicago: A!dine Publishing Co., 1972.

Gakkenbush, U. W. The use of Hypnotic Inhibition to Study the


Development of Human Personality. The Johns Hopkins University
Applied Physics Library Bulletin (Translation Series!! Report. TB
230T-153, 1960. Translation from Sovremennaia Psikhonevrologiia
1928, 7, 272-277.

Gakkenbush, 11. M., Polinkovskii, S. I . , & Fundiller, R. I . Experimental


Study of Personality Development by Hypnotic Inhibition. The Johns
Hopkins University Applied Physic's Laboratory (Translation~Series).
Report No. TG-230-T-152, 1960. Translation from Trudy In s titu tia
Psifchonevrologia Kiev. 1930, 2 , 236-272.

Gard, B. & Kurtz, R. M. Hypnotic Age Regression and Cognitive


Perceptual Tasks. The American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis, 1979,
21, 268-277.

Gazzaniga, M. S ., Steen, D ., & Volpe, B. T. Functional neuroscience.


New York: Harper & Row, 1979.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Gebhard, J. W. Hypnotic Age Regression: A Review. American Journal of
Clinical Hypnosis, 1961, 139-168.

Gidro-Frank, L ., & Bowersbuch, M. K. A Study of the Plantar Response in


Hypnotic Age Regression. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disorders,
1948, 107, 443-458.

Haley, J. Advanced Techniques of Hypnosis and Therapy: Selected Papers


of Milton Erickson, M.D. New York: Grune and Stratton, 196/.

Hilgard, E. R. The experience of hypnosis: a shorter version of


hypnotic su scep tib ility. New York: Harcourt Brace Janovich, 1968.

Hilgard, E. R. & Bower, G. H. Theories of learning (third e d itio n ).


New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1966.

Hodge, J ., & Wagner, E. The Effect of Trance Depth on Rorschach Responses.


American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis, 1969, 11, 234-238.

H olt, R. R. Manual fo r the scoring of primary process manifestations


in Rorschach responses. New York: Research Center fo r Mental
Health, 1960.

Huse, B. Does the Hypnotic Trance Favor the Recall of Faint Memories?
Journal of Experimental Psychology. 1930, 13^ 519-529.

Keir, G. An Experiment-in Mental Testing During Hypnosis. Journal of


Mental- Science., 1945, 9_1, 346-352*.

Kline, M. V. Hypnotic Age Regression and Intelligence. Journal of


Genetic Psychology. 1950, 77^, 129-132.

Kline, M. V. Hypnotic Retrogression: A Neuropsychological Theory of


Age Regression and Progression. International Journal of Clinical
and Experimental Hypnosis, 1953, 1_» 21-28.

Kline, M. V. & Haggerty, A. D. An Hypnotic Experimental Approach to the .


Genesis of Occupational Interests and Choice I I I . Hypnotic Age
Regression and the Thematic Apperception Test. A Clinical Case Study
in Occupational Id entification . International Journal of C linical and
Experimental Hypnosis, 1953, 18-31.

Kline, M. V. & Guze, H. The Use of a Projective Drawing Technique in


the Investigation of Hypnotic Age Regression and Progression.
B ritish Journal of Medical Hypnotism, 1951, 3^, 10-21.

Klopfer, B ., Ainsworth, M.D., Klopfer, W. G. & Holt, R. R. Developments


in the Rorschach technique, volume I: and theory, New York: Harcourt
Brace & World, In c ., 1954.

Kupper, H .I. Psychic Concomitants in Wartime Injuries. Psychosomatic


Medicine, 1945, 7, 15-21.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
LeCron, L. M. The Loss During Hypnotic Age Regression of an Established
Conditional Reflex. Psychiatric Quarterly, 1952, 26, 657-662.

Leeds, M. A Hypnotic Regression Series. Persona 1949, 1_,13-16.

Lindner, R. L. Rebel without a cause the story of a criminal


psychopath, New York: Grune & Stratton, 1944.

McConkey, K. M. & Sheehan, P. W. Inconsistency in Hypnotic Age


Regression and Cue Structure as Supplied by the Hypnotist.
The International Journal of C linical and Experimental
Hypnosis, 1§80, 28, 394-4081

McCranie, E. J. & Crasilneck, H. B. The Conditioned Reflex in


Hypnotic Age Regression. Journal of C linical & Experimen­
ta l Psychopathology, 1955, 16, 120-123.

McCranie, E .J.; Crasilneck, H. B. & Tefer, H. R. The Electroencephalogram


in Hypnotic Age Regression. Psychiatric Quarterly, 1955, 29,85-88.

McGraw, M. B. Development o f the Plantar Response in Young


Infants. American Journal Diseases of Children, 1941, 61,
1215- 1221.

Mercer, M. & Gibson, R. W. Rorschach Content in Hypnosis:


Chronological Age Level Regression. Journal of Clinical
Psychology, 1950, _6, 352-358.

M itchell, M. B. Retroactive In hibition and Hypnosis. Journal of


General Psychology, 1932, 7_, 343-359.

Morgan, A. H. & Hilgard, J.R. The Stanford Hypnotic Clinical Scale for
Adults. The American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis, 1978, 1979, 21,
134-147.

Norgab, B A. Rorschach Psychodiagnosis in Hypnotic Regression.


In L. M. LeCron (Ed.) Experimental Hypnosis, New York: McMillian,
1952.

O'Connell, D.; Shor, R. & Orne, M. Hypnotic Age Regression: An


Empirical and Methodological Analysis. Journal of
Abnormal Psychology, 1970, 76, 1-32.

Orne, M. T. & O'Connel, D.N. Age Regression by Hypnosis:


A Review of R e iff, R. and Scheerer, M. Memory and Age Regression.
Contemporary Psychology, 1961, £ , 70-77.

Orne, M. T. The Mechanisms of Hypnotic Age Regression: An Experimental


Study. Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 1951, 46,
213-225.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Parrish, M.; Lundy, R. M. & Leibowitz, H. W. Effect of Hypnotic Age
Regression on the Magnitude of the Ponzo and Poggendorff Illusions.
Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 1969, 74, 693-698.

Penfield, W. Memory Mechanisms. Archives of Neurological Psychiatry


1952, 67, 178-198.

P h illip s , L. & Smith, J.G. Rorschach interpretation: advanced


technique, New York: Grune and S tratton, 1953.

Platonow, K. I . On the Objective Proof of the Experimental Personality


Age Regression. Journal of General Psychology, 1933, 9, 190-209.

Raikov, V. L. Age Regression to Infancy by Adult Subjects in Deep


Hypnosis. The American Journal of C linical Hypnosis, 1980, 22,
(3),156-162.

R e iff, R. & Scheer, M. Memory and Hypnotic Age Regression. New York:
International University.Press, i960.

Reyher, J. & Shoemaker, D. A Comparison Between Hypnotically Induced


Age Regression and Waking Stories to TAT Cards:
A preliminary report. Journal of Consulting Psychology, 1961, 25,
409-413.

Rosenthal, B. G. Hypnotic Recall of Material Learned Under Anxiety


and Non-anxiety Producing Conditions. Journal of Personality, 1950, 19
221-228.

Sarbin, T. R. Rorschach Patterns Under Hypnosis. American Journal


of Orthopsychiatry, 1939, 315-318.

Sarbin, T. R. Mental Changes in Experimental Regression. Journal of


Personality, 1950, 3J, 221-228.

Schirado, W. C. The effects of standardized and personalized hypnotic


induction techniques on depth of trance. Unpublished Doctoral
Dissertation, Western Michigan University, 1979.

Schofield, L..& Reyher, J. thematic Productions Under Hypnotically


Aroused Conflict in Age Regressed and Waking States Using the Real-
Simulator Desiqn. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 1974, 83 (2 ),
130-139.

Schwartz, B. E.; Bickford, R. G. & Rasmussen, W. G. Hypnotic Phenomena


Including Hypnotically Activated Seizures Studied with the Electro­
encephalogram. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disorders, 1955, 122,
564-574. :

Sears, A. B. A comparison of Hypnotic and Waking Recall. International


Journal of C linical and Experimental Hypnosis, 1954, 2 , 296-304.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
68
Solom on, D. & Goodson, D. H yp n o tic Age Regression E v a lu ate d A g a in s t a
C r it e r io n o f P r io r P erform ance. The In te r n a tio n a l Jo u rn al o f C lin ic a l
and E xp e rim en tal H ypn o sis. 1 9 7 1 , 4 1 , 2 4 3 -2 5 9 .

Spanos, N. P.; Ferhana, A. & Hendrikus, S. J. Hypnotic Age Regression


and Eidetic Imagery: A fa ilu re to replicate.' Journal of Abnormal
Psychology, 1979, 88, 88-91.

Spiegel, H ., Shor, J . , & Fishman, S. An Hypnotic Ablation Technique for


the Study of Personality Development. Psychosomatic Medicine,
1945, 7, 273-278.

Stalnaker, J. M., & Riddle, E. E. The Effect of Hypnosis on Long


Delayed Recall. Journal of General Psychology, 1932, £ , 429-440.

Staples, E. A ., & Wilensky, H. A Controlled Rorschach Investigation


of Hypnotic Age Regression. Journal of Projective Techniques and
Personality Assessment, 1968, 32, 246-252.

Taylor, A. The D ifferen tiatio n Between Simulated and True Hypnotic


Regression by Figure Drawings. Unpublished Masters Thesis, City
College of New York, 1950.

True, R. M. Experimental Control in Hypnotic Age Regression States.


Science, 1949, U 0 , 583-584.

True, R. M .S te p h e n s o n , C. W. Controlled Experiments Correlating


Electroencephalogram, Pulse, and Plantar Reflexes with Hypnotic Age
Regression and Induced Emotional States. Personality, 1951, 1_?
252-263.

Walker, N. S ., G arrett, J. B ., & Wallace, B. Restoration of Eidetic


Imagery via Hypnotic Age Regression: A preliminary report. Journal
of Abnormal Psychology, 1976, 85, 335-337.

Wallace, B. Restoration of Eidetic Imagery via Hypnotic Age


Regression: More evidence. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 1978,
87, 673-675.

Weitzenhoffer, A ., & Hilgard, E. Stanford Hypnotic Susceptibility Scale


Form C. Palo A lto , California: Consulting Psychologists Press,
1962.

White, R. W., Fox, G. F ., & H arris, W. W. Hypnotic Hypermnesia for


Recently Learned M aterial. Journal of Abnormal and Social
Psychology, 1940, 35, 88-103.

Wiseman, R. J ., & Reyher, J. Hypnotically Induced Dreams Using the


Rorschach Inkblots as Stim uli. Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology, 1973, 27^, 329-336.

Wolberg, L. P. Hypnoanalysis. New York: Grune and Stratton, 1964.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Yates, A. J. Simulation and Hypnotic Age Regression, International
Journal of C linical Hypnosis, 1960, 8_, 243-249.

Yates, A. J. Hypnotic Age Regression. Psychological B ulletin, 1961, 58,


429-440.

Young, P. C. An Experimental Study of Mental and Physical Functions


in the Normal and Hypnotic States. American Journal of Psychology,
1926, 37, 345-356.

Young, P. C. The V erid ic ality of Hypnotically Induced Regression.


Psychological B u lle tin , 1937, 34, 784.

Young, P.C. Hypnotic Regression-Fact or A rtifa c t. Journal of Abnormal


and Social Psychology, 1940, 35, 273-278.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
70

APPENDIX A: PILOT STUDY

METHOD

Subjects were selected fo r the p ilo t study on the basis of

a v a ila b ility and willingness to participate when verbally requested to do

so. While the subjects a ll proved to be moderate to highly hypnotizable,

Stanford Hypnotic Clinical Scale-Adult (SHCS-Adult) scores of three or more

items passed, only one subject obtained a score as high as four on the age

regression item (one is no experience of regression, fiv e is the experience

of returning to an e a rlie r age and reliving that age). One of the four

subjects was not given the SHCS-Adult but was able to produce rigid arm

catalepsy during the in it ia l hypnotic session, suggesting at least moderate

hypnotizability. The subjects were a ll female ranging in age from 17 to

41.

A counterbalanced design was produced by having two subjects take the

Rorschach in the waking state f i r s t and then la te r a fte r three to fiv e

hypnotic and age regression training sessions in the age regressed state.

For the other two subjects three to five hypnotic and age regression

training sessions were provided a fte r the in it ia l assessment, with the

Rorschach given in the age regressed state in the last hypnotic session,

the waking state Rorschach was then administered two days a fte r the age

regression Rorschach. For both groups amnesia was induced during hypnosis

a fte r the f ir s t Rorschach was administered whether i t was administered in

the waking or age regressed stated. The four subjects were able to open

th e ir eyes and remain age regressed. During age regression i t was

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
suggested that the subjects would return to th e ir kindergarten room and

feel at ease with the man who would have them do some things. Figure 2

summarizes the experimental design and procedure.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Subject 1 Subject 2 Subject 3 Subject 4
Hypnotized SHCC-Adult SHCA-Adult SHCS-Adult
arm cata­ age regres-' age regres­ age regression
lepsy sion items sion item item score:
induced score: four score: three three maybe
maybe four four

. ■
Waking Waking
state state
Rorschach Rorschach


Three age Three age Four age Three age
regression regression regression regression
training training training training
sessions sessions sessions sessions
amnesia for amnesia for
waking state waking state
Rorschach Rorschach .
induced induced

Age regres­ Age regres­ Age regres­ Age regression


sion Ror­ sion sion Ror­ Rorschach
schach amnesia Rorschach schach amnesia
for testing fo r testing
induced induced

Waking Debriefing Waking Debriefing


state state
Rorschach and Rorschach and
debriefing debriefing

Figure 2. P ilot Study Experimental Design and Procedure

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
73
RESULTS

Table A shows the Rorschach results for th e .p ilo t study subjects. The

Rorschachs were scored according to the Exner Comprehensive System (1974).

Table A

Rorschach Results fo r P ilo t Study Subjects

SHCS-Adult Subject 1 Subject 2 Subject 3 Subject 4


Age Regression Not Given 4 3-4 3-4
Score

Rorschach
Category______ Waking Hy* Making Hy* Waking Hy* Making Hy*
R 28 30 22 13 35 27 42 29
Location
W 15 10 5 4 7 5 6 4
D 12 19 17 9 27 22 36 24
Dd 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
S 3 4 1 1 5 6 4 3
DW 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Determinants
M 1 0 3 2 7 4 9 4
FM 1 2 1 0 5 1 3 5
m 1 0 2 0 0 0 3 1
FC 1 3 0 0 4 3 1 1
CF 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 0
C+Cn 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Wt. sum C .5 1.5 0 1 4 1.5 .5 .5
Sum C‘ 1 3 0 0 2 2 1 1
Sum T 3 2 0 1 9 0 2 1
Sum Y 1 0 2 0 1 0 2 1
Sum V 1 0 2 0 1 0 2 1
Sum a ll shading 6 6 2 2 12 2 5 4
FD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Fr + rF 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0
(2) 2 5 7 3 14 7 13 7
F 19 19 11 9 15 17 17 13
Ratios &
Deviations
P 4 6 4 2 3 3 7 4
Lambda 2.1 1.7 1.2 2.3 .68 .63 .68 .68
X+% 75% 75% 95% 92% 75% 82% 90% 77%
F+% 72% 70% 90% 82% 68% 85% 88% 76%
A% 71% 73% 45% 23% 26% 33% 40% 68%

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
74
Rorschach
Category Waking Hy* Waking Hy* Waking Hy* Waking Hy*
Afr .47 .43 .29 .63 .40 .50 .50 .38
3r + (2)/R .28 .16 .32 .23 .40 ' .26 .40 .24
H + Hd 3 6 9 6 15 12 10 10
If 14 10 6 3 17 12 18 5
Blends 2 0 1 0 2 2 2 2
EArep 1.5/8 1.5/11 3/4 3/1 10.5/9 5.5/3 11/9 4.5/10
M:sum C 1: .5 0:1.5 3:0 2:1 7:4 4:: 1.5 9:.5 4:.5
Special
Scores
DV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
AL0G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
INC0M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FABC0M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Sum Special 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Scores
PSV 2 4 0 0 2 2 0 1

*Hy=Hypnoti c Age Regression

In reviewing Table A differences seem evident on a subject by subject

basis. To better explore the differences between the waking and age

regressed states the total group means were calculated and these are

presented in Table B.

Table B

Rorschach Means for Age Regressed and Waking States

Rorschach
Category Waking State Means Age Regressed Means
R 31.75 24.75
Location
W 8.25 5.75
D 23.0 18.50
Dd .50 .50
S 3.25 3.50
DW 0 0
Determinants
M 5.0 2.50
FM 2.50 2.0
m 1.50 .25
FM+m 4.00 2.25
FC 1.50 1.75

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
75

Rorschach
Category Waking State Means Age Regressed Means
CF .25 .50
CF+C+Cn .25 .50
Weighted sum C 1.25 1.12
Sum C' 1.00 1.50
Sum T 3.50 1.00
Sum Y 1.50 .25
Sum a ll shading 3.50
FD 0 0
Fr + rF 1.00 0
(2 ) 9.00 5.50
F 15.50 14.50
Ratios &
Deviations
P 4.50 3.75
Lambda 1.16 1.32
X=% .84 .82
F+% .80 .78
A% .46 .49
Afr .42 .49
3r+(2)/R .35 .22
H + Hd 9.25 8.50
Zf 13.75 7.50
Blends 1.75 .50
EA >ep* 50% 50%
Special
Scores
DV 0 0
ALOG .25 0
FABCOM .25 0
CONTAM 0 0
Sum Special
Scores .50 0
PSV 1.00 .75

♦Percent EA>ep

Table B revealed some apparent differences between the waking state

Rorschachs for the four subjects and the age regressed Rorschachs. Table C

presents the results of t -tests done to compare the means on waking state

versus age regressed Rorschachs.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
76
T ab le C

Correlated Sample t-te s ts Comparing Waking State and Age Regression


Rorschach Scores

Rorschach Rorschach
Category t (df=3) Category t (df=3)

R 2.20 Ratios &


U 1.44 Deviations
D .31 P .68
Dd 1.78 Lambda .97
S -.89 X+% .54
DW 0 F+% .07
Determinants A% .36
M 3.57 Afr .69
FM .38 3r + (2}/R 1.41
m 2.23 H + Hd .52
FM+m 1.71 Zf 7.97***
FC .10 Blends 2.60*
CF .40 Special
Weighted Sum C .30 Scores
Sum C' .40 DV -

Sum T 1.15 ALOG -

Sum Y 5.00** INC0M 1.04


Sum V 8.00*** FABC0M 1.04
Fr + rF 1.75 Sum Special 1.21
FD - Scores
(2) 1.57 PSV 1.56

Two tailed t-te s t


P <.10*
P < .0 5 **
£ < .0 1 * * *

The results of the jt-tests presented in Table C revealed four

comparisons that were at or less than the .05 probability level, and one

comparison that reached the .10 or trend level of significance. These

results do not support an overall hypotheses of a significant difference

between Rorschachs performed in the waking state versus the age regressed

state using a sample of four subjects three of whom obtained SHCS-Adult

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission
77
scores of three or more items past and scores of three or four on the age

regression items.

A Sign Test was applied to the data presented in Table B, a plus was

assigned i f the direction of the group means were in accord with the age

norms presented by Exner (Exner, 1978; Exner, Weiner & Schuyler, 1976) and

a minus i f i t were not. Thus, fo r example, i f the mean number of M

responses in the adult waking state was larger than the age regressed mean

a plus was assigned because the results were in the direction predicted by

the age norms. In the Sign Test only those categories where the age norms

did not allow a direct comparison were excluded (FM, m, C + Cn/C + CF + Cn,

and Sum C). The scoring categories and the sign according to the age norms

as well as results of the Sign Test are presented in Table D.

Table D

Waking State and Age Regression Sign Correspondence to Exner Age Norms and
Sign Test

Category Sign Category Sign Category Sign


R + Sum T + Afr +
W - Sum Y + 3r + (2)/R -

D + Sum a ll H + Hd +
Dd 0 Shading + ZF -

S + FD 0 Blends +
DW 0 Fr + r f + EA ep 0
M + (2) + DV 0
FM + m + F + ALOG -

FC - P + FABCOM -

CF + Lambda + PSV +
Weighted X+% + Sum Spec­
Sum C + F+% + ia l Scores -

Sum C - A% +

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
7.8
+ = waking state and age regressed group means in the expected direction of
Exner Age Norms, - = not in expected direction
0 = no difference between waking and age regressed means

Sign Test £ < .01

Table D shows that the results of the Sign Test favor a rejection to

the null hypotheses that the subjects did not show a correspondence to

th e ir respective Exner (Exner, 1978; Exner, Weiner & Schuyler, 1976) age

norms depending upon whether they were in the age regressed or waking

state. Thus, the subjects showed Rorschach scores in the direction of the

Exner (Exner, 1978; Exner, Weiner & Schuyler, 1976) age norms; in the

waking state the scores were in the direction of the adult norms, during

age regression to age 5 they were in the direction of the age 5 norms.

DISCUSSION

The lack of s ta tis tic a l significance between the waking and age

regressed Rorschachs fo r the p ilo t study subjects is mitigated by several

factors. F irs t, the sample size was small, and considerable variation was

evident between the subjects which masked actual differences when making

group comparisons. One subject showed an increase in A% of 28% during age

regression versus the waking state, lower and even opposite directions in

A% fo r the other subjects hid this difference. Closely related to the

individual differences were the psychodynamics related to Rorschach

performance. Subject two was in outpatient psychotherapy at the time of

testing and recalled age fiv e as a time of relative ly less co n flic t. The

above factors could account for her higher adult versus age regressed A%,

i t would account fo r EA being lower than ep in the waking state.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Subject one was also somewhat idiosyncratic in that her age regressed

Rorschach results were quite discrepant from the age norms (two standard

deviations above the age fiv e norm in total number of responses (R) as an

example). When interviewed la te r she explained that in many ways she was a

precocious five-year-o ld, pushed and encouraged to perform. Thus, the word

dissect used in her age fiv e Rorschach responses was not discrepant with

her functioning at age fiv e because at that time she had a dissection k it.

At age 17 when she participated in the experiment she was more rebellious

despite being a college engineering student.

Another factor to be considered was the nature of the age norms

established by Exner (1978; Exner, Weiner & Schuyler, 1976). In a ll of the

scoring categories using the adult mean and standard deviation and

establishing a confidence interval two standard deviations below the mean

is well within the confidence interval set up by using the age five

standard deviationand going two standard deviations above the age five

mean, even though theseare the mostdiscrepant from the adult norms.

Thus, a s ta tis tic a lly significant difference may be d iffic u lt to find

between the Rorschachs of age regressed subjects and those of the same

subjects in the waking state. This is particularly true fo r such

categories as X+% where the adult mean d iffers by only 2 percentage points

from the age fiv e mean. Thus, the significant differences revealed by the

sign test demonstrated how the waking state and age regressed group means

for each Rorschach scoring category were significantly (at the .01 level)

in the directions expected given the Exner (1978; Exner, Weiner & Schuyler,

1976) age norms. This result was obtained despite relatively few

significant differences between the waking state and age regressed group

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
80

means fo r each Rorschach scoring category and underlines the point that

because of the nature of the age norms, significant differences between

waking state and age regressed group means may not be found. The results

of the sign test also suggested that differences between age regressed

subjects and simulators may be more in the manner of direction, and perhaps

not revealed by testing for significance between group means.

Another d iffic u lty with the p ilo t study was that the subjects did not

fu lly meet the c rite ria of excellent age regression subjects as measured by

the SHCS-Adult. Only one subject obtained a score of four on in itia l

screening, with two other subjects saying "three maybe four" when asked

about th e ir experience during the age regression item. During the training

sessions a ll of the subjects reported an increased capacity to experience

themselves as age fiv e . Subject one showed clear cut mannerisms of a child

during testing and, in fa c t, balked during the testing and had to be

encouraged to continue. Another subject performed well while taking the

Rorschach as a five-year-old until the experimenter's c o llie pushed open

the door and entered the room. Had the experimenter been more a le rt, he

could have said something lik e "how did that dog get in the school?"

In addition to the Rorschach, a ll of the subjects were asked to "put

your name here" on a piece of paper, in both the hypnotically regressed and

waking states. All of the subjects printed th eir names in the age

regressed state. One subject's printing (subject 1) was like a scrawl,

suggestive of age regressed functioning and a ll of the subjects used the

correct last name for when they were age fiv e . The adult waking state

names were written in three of the cases, printed in one. Subject number

four who printed her name in both age regressed and waking states, printed

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
her name across an entire sheet of paper in the age regressed state, but

kept within the lines in the waking state. The handwriting samples were

suggestive of genuine age regression (Hilgard, 1968).

The p ilo t study suggested several factors to be considered in a fu ll

scale study. F irs t, a larger sample size would be useful.

Counterbalancing the usefulness o f a larger sample size is the time and

expense involved when adding additional subjects. Individual as well as

group variations must be considered when evaluating the effects of age

regression. Testing for s ta tis tic a l significance can be supplemented by

comparing groups and individuals with the age norms. For instance, an

individual or group that performs more than two standard deviations below

the adult age norms in the age regressed state but scores well within the

adult norm confidence intervals during the waking Rorschach is showing a

difference, thus a sign test may be used. These differences could become

more evident when comparing minimally susceptible hypnotic simulators and

hypnotically age regressable subjects.

Lastly, the p ilo t study indicated that subjects should not come from a

clinical population as the c lin ic a l population age norms are less

discrepant from the age five age norms than are normal adult age norms.

When evaluating the results, some attention has to be paid to individual

psychodynamics that might account for variations from either adult or age

five age norms.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
82
APPENDIX B

HANDOUT EXPLANATION TO POTENTIAL VOLUNTEERS


DESCRIBING INVOLVEMENT IN RESEARCH
CONCERNING HYPNOSIS

I am looking fo r volunteers to participate in research concerning hypnosis


and related experiences. Each volunteer has to be at least 18 years old.

The research w ill be carried out by a doctoral student trained and


experienced in the use of hypnosis. You w ill not be asked to do anything
that w ill make you look s illy or prove embarrassing. There w ill be no
e ffo rt to probe into personal a ffa irs or to provide treatment. The
experiment w ill be conducted solely for serious s c ien tific purposes.

There are no expected risks due to participation in the research.


Furthermore, the experimenter w ill be available to answer any questions you
may have following participation. Only a lim ited number of volunteers w ill
be included in the research. I f you have any questions and/or would lik e
to schedule an appointment, call or contact:

Name:__________________________

Phone:_________________________

Address: ._______

(Adapted from Schirado, 1979)

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
83
APPENDIX C

INFORMED CONSENT FORM

Purpose of the research: The purpose of this research is to study


individual- reactions and experiences during various hypnotic and other
related experiences.

Procedures: After an in it ia l screening, volunteers w ill be assigned to


various experimental procedures.

While certain data w ill be collected, no e ffo rt w ill be made to probe into
personal a ffa irs . The data w ill be held in s tric t confidence. I t is
further considered most rare that subjects have unwanted side effects or
concerns a fte r having been hypnotized once or many times. The experimenter
w ill remain available to answer any questions you may have following
participation in the experiment.

C onfidentiality: The data collected in this experiment w ill be held in


confidence. The published dissertation w ill not contain any subject names,
only age and sex may be included with the data.

P articipation: Participation in the research is voluntary. The volunteer


may, at any time cease participation and have a ll data from th eir
participation destroyed. Participation in the experiment w ill not in any
way affect your employment or student status.

I have had an opportunity to review and ask questions


regarding the above statements and I wish to participate
voluntarily in the research as described.

Si gned:_______________________________

Witness:______________________________

Sex:____________ Age___________________

Date:_________________________________

(Adapted from Schirado, 1979)

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
84
APPENDIX D

DEBRIEFING

To be presented to the volunteer verbatim:

"Now that you have concluded the experiment, t e ll me i f you have


any questions or concerns regarding your experiences." (Wait for
response.) "I can't t e ll you about the exact nature of the experiment
until i t is completed, but I ' l l be glad to meet with you in (specify time
when subjects w ill a ll have completed the experimental process) to discuss
the experiment, ju s t give me a call at that time." " Although i t is very
rare for peopleto experienceunwanted side effects a fte r hypnosis, you may
contact me by calling (subject handed debriefing handout).

(Adapted from Schirado, 1979)

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
85

APPENDIX E

DEBRIEFING HANDOUT

Thank you for your help and participation in this research. I f questions
or concerns arise a fte r you leave today, feel free to contact me. I can be
reached at:

(Name)________________________

(Phone)_______________________

(Address)_____________________

(Adapted from Schirado, 1979)

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
APPENDIX F

INDIVIDUAL SUBJECT SCORES ON THE STANFORD. HYPNOTIC CLINICAL SCALE FOR


' ' ADULTS (SHCS-ADULT) '

Group I Age Regression

SHCS-Adult Score on
Subject Items Passed Age Regression Item

1 4 5
2 4 5
3 5 4
4 5 4
5 5 4
6 5 5

Group I I Deep Hypnosis


SHCS-Adult Score on
Subject Items Passed Age Regression Item

7 3 4
8 4 2
9 3 4
10 5 4
11 3 2
12 5 4

Group I I I Hypnotizable Simulators


SHCS-Adult Score on
Subject Items Passed Age Regression Item

13 4 3
14 4 4
15 4 3
16 3 3
17 4 3
18 4 4

Minimally Susceptible Simulators


Group IV
SHCS-Adult Score on
Subject Items Passed Age Regression Item

19 0 3
20 1 3
21 0 2
22 1 2
23 1 3
24 1 2

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
87
APPENDIX G

A NOTE ON SOME SUBJECTS WHO EXPERIENCED SOME DISTRESS

IN RELATION TO THE EXPERIMENT

The following descriptions are of two subjects who noted some negative

experiences that caused them to discontinue involvement in the experiment.

Also described is one subject who noted an exacerbation of some previous

symptoms that were correlated with the conclusion of the experiment. The

f ir s t two subjects • report no psychological distress related to the

experiment and the last reports a considerable r e lie f from emergent

symptoms.

SUBJECT A

Subject A was in the age regression experimental group. The subject

reported that during age regression they were beginning to recall more

vivid ly e a rlie r troublesome issues with th e ir parents. The subject also

reported that while these issues are always active, particularly in the

relationship with th e ir parents, age regression simply made them more aware

of them. The subject decided to discontinue involvement in the experiment.

Follow-up was easy as the experimenter has frequent contact with the

individual. Observations have indicated no problem or symptoms. When the

subject was asked d irectly about how they were doing seven weeks a fte r they

had discontinued involvement with the experiment, no psychological distress

due to the experiment was reported.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
While the experimenter had focused on the subject returning to a happy

day in childhood, he might have done better to suggest more directly that

the subject not recall troublesome experiences. Once negative memories

were reported, he might also have been well to help the subject rerepress

such material with the additional instructions given that they could easily

recall such information i f they ever decided to enter psychotherapy to work

out issues with th e ir parents. There were no clinical indications that

this person wanted psychotherapy at this time, i f such indications arise in

the future, a referral w ill be made.

SUBJECT B

Subject B was also in the age regression experimental group. When

f ir s t age regressed to fiv e , the subject reported feeling i l l , but was able

to complete the session. Later, in the waking state, this volunteer

reported that when they were fiv e years of age, they were almost

continually i l l , and in fact missed prolonged periods of school. The

experience of returning to age fiv e had thus proven unpleasant and this

subject decided to discontinue involvement in the experiment.

Despite the unpleasantness of the age regression experience fo r this

volunteer,'no i l l effects werfe reported to continue afte r they were out of

trance. A phone call seven weeks la te r found the subject reporting no

aftereffects or psychological distress due to participation in the

experiment.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
89
SUBJECT C

Subject C was in the deep hypnosis group and had a history of

nocturnal teeth grinding or bruxism that had not been detected prior to

in itia tio n of involvement in the experiment. Otherwise, there was no

reason to question this volunteer's acceptability for involvement in the

experiment.

During the last session, the subject reported a tightness of the jaw

and a suggestion was given that i t might loosen. In the next week

following the experiment, the subject reported an extremely painful jaw.

At that time, the history of bruxism was uncovered. In addition, on at

least one previous occasion prior to involvement in the volunteer had

suffered in a sim ilar fashion with an abscessed tooth. Neither the subject

nor the experimenter could directly tie the pain to involvement in the

experiment, and indeed there were some tension producing problems currently

in the subject's li f e .

Nevertheless, some hypoanthesthesia and b rie f treatment were offered

to the subject. She also consulted her dentist who ruled out an abscessed

tooth and suggested the pain was related to bruxism. The subject was given

a prescription fo r Valium and a pain re lie f drug by the dentist and fitte d

for a night-time biting plate.

The volunteer continued to meet with the experimenter and has found

r e lie f through hypnosis. While some symptoms persist, the volunteer

reports considerable improvement. The dentist has requested a l i s t of

other hypnotic practioners whom he could refer other bruxism patients to

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
90
and a physician who had knowledge of the situation requested that the

experimenter teach him how to do hypnosis.

In this situation , there appears to be only a correlation between the

exacerbation of previous symptoms with experimentation. The experimenter

f e l t the best course was to provide as much assistance as possible.

Later, the previously ruled out abscessed tooth was found by the

dentist to be the cause of the patient's pain and appropriate treatment was

in itia te d .

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
APPENDIX H

PERCENTAGE AGREEMENT ON INITIAL INDEPENDENT SCORING FOR


EXPERIMENTER AND ADDITIONAL SCORER FOR EACH RESPONSE

GROUP I

Subject 1

Pretest Experimental

I. 1. 90% I. 1 . 92%
II. 2. 100% II. 2. 82%
3. 93% 3. 80%
III. 4. 83% III. 4. 75%
5. 100% IV. - 100%
IV. 6. 83% V. 5. 83%
7. 92% VI. - 100%
V. 8. 87% V II. 6 94%
9. 85% V II I . 7 83%
V I. 100% IX. - 100%
V II. 10. 79% X. 8 82%
V III. 11. 93% 9. 86%
12. 79% 10. 82%
IX. 13. 76%
X. 14. 100% Overall Agreement:
15. 55%

Overall Agreement: 86%

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
S u b je c t 2

P r e te s t . Experim ental

I. 1. 93% I. 1. 100%
II. 2. 87% II. 2. 80%
3. 90% 3. 83%
III. 4. 83% 4. 100%
IV. - 00% 5. 91%
V. 5. 83% III. 6. 80%
VI. - 100% 7. 71%
V II. 6. 78% 8. 75%
V I II. 7. 83% 9. 73%
8. 100% IV. 10. 92%
IX. 9. 73% V. 11. 92%
X. 10. 100% VI. 12. 83%
V II. 13. 85%
Overall Agreement: 86% 14. 100%
V III. 15. 72%
16. 80%
17. 100%
IX. 18. 67%
19. 70%
20. 83%
X. 21. 80%
22. 92%
23. 91%
24. 92%
25. 100%

Overall Agreement: 85%

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
S u b je c t 3

P r e te s t • Experim ental

I. 1. 100% I. 1. 71%
2. 100% 2. 92%
II. 3. 87% II. 3. 73%
4. 89% III. 4. 69%
III. 5. 82% IV. 5. 88%
IV. 6. 84% V. 6. 77%
V. 7. 93% VI. 7. 73%
VI. 8. 90% V II. 8. 86%
9. 91% V III. 100%
V II. 10. 74% IX. 9. 88%
V II I . 11. 79% X. 10. 90%
12. 77% 11. 83%
13. 75%
14. 90% Overall Agreement: 81%
IX. 15. 85%
X. 16. 80%
17. 80%
18. 82%
19. 100%

Overall Agreement: 87%

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
S u b je c t 4

Posttest Experim ental

I. 1. 75% I. 1. 93%
2. 67% 2. 94%
II. 3. 88% 3. 100%
III. 4. 100% 4. 100%
IV. 5. 100% II. 5. 100%
V. 6. 93% 6. 94%
VI. 7. 80% III. 7. 100%
8. 100% 8. 100%
V II. 9. 86% -9. 83%
10. 90% VI. 10. 0%
V III. 11. 76% 11. 93%
12. 100% V. 12. 95%
IX. - 100% V I. 13. 100%
X. 13. 79% V II. 14. 100%
14. 100% V III. 15. 100%
15. 91% IX. 16. 73%
16. 82% X. 17. 73%
18. 100%
Overall Agreement: 88% 19. 100%
20. 85%
21. 94%

Overall Agreement: 93%

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
S u b je c t 5

P o s tte s t Experim ental

I. 1. 100% I. 1. 100%
2. 100% 2. 100%
II. 3. 88% II. 3. 94%
4. 79% 4. 100%
5. 100% 5. 0%
6. 71% 6. 61%
III. 7. 83% III. 7. 75%
8. 73% 8. 100%
9. 58% 9. 0%
10. 75% IV. 10. 69%
IV. 11. 71% 11. 92%
12. 83% V. 12. 94%
13. 0% 13. 75%
14. 82% VI. 14. 92%
V. 15. 100% 15. 100%
16. 93% 16. 100%
17. 93% 17. 100%
18. 80% V II. 18.
19. 83% 19. 100%
VI. 20. 100% 20. 58%
21. 70% 21. 100%
22. 80% 1111. 22. 100%
23. 80% 23. 82%
24. 77% 24. 0%
V II. 25. 94% 25. 100%
26. 83% IX. 26. 100%
III. 27. 100% 27. 92%
28. 67% 28. 92%
29. 85% 29. 91%
30. 80% X. 30. 87%
31. 80% 31. 100%
IX. 32. 71% 32. 100%
33. 92% 33. 80%
34. 82% 34. 64%
35. 90%
36. 80% Overall Agreement: 87%
X. 37. 80%
38. 91%
39. 86%
40. 92%
41. 92%

Overall Agreement: 93%

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
S u b je c t 6

P o s tte s t E x p e rim e n ta l.

I. 1. 100% I. 1. 93%
2. 100% II. 2. 83%
II. 3. 100% 3. 94%
4. 92% III. 4. 95%
III. 5. 88% IV. 5. 73%
IV. 6. 83% 6. 92%
V. 7. 86% V. 7. 100%
VI. 8. 80% VI. 8. 100%
V II. 9. 83% V II. 9. 89%
V III. 10. 94% 10. 91%
IX. 11. 88% V III. 11. 92%
X. 12. 60% IX. 12. 82%
X. 13. 71%
Overall Agreement: 87%
Overall Agreement%: 87%

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
GROUP I I

Subject 7

Pretest Experim ental

I. 1. 82% I. 1. 92%
2. 75% II. 2. 89%
II. 3. 81% III. 3. 89%
III. 4. 83% IV. 4. 67%
IV. 5. 90% V. 5. 100%
6. 00% VI. 6. 75%
V. 7. 87% V II. 7. 75%
VI. 8. 100% V II I . 8. 70%
V II. 9. 100% IX. 9. 75%
V III. 10. 79% X. 10. 69%
IX. 11. 81% 11. 82%
X. 12. 100%
13. 88% Overall Agreement: 81%
14. 91%

Overall Agreement: 83%

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
S u b je c t 8

P r e te s t Exp erim en tal

I. 1. 86% I. 1. 75%
2. 100% 2. 86%
II. 3. 75% II. 3. 75%
III. 4. 85% III. 4. 95%
5. 00% 5. 100%
IV. 6. 83% IV. 6. 92%
7. 100% V. 7. 88%
V. 8. 100% VI. 8. 77%
VI. 9. 100% V II. 9. 80%
V II. 10. 81% V III. 10. 96%
V II I . 11. 81% 11. 73%
IX. 12. 74% IX. 12. 77%
X. 13. 73% X. 13. 77%
14. 67% 14. 85%

Overall Agreement: 81% Overall Agreement: 85%

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
S u b je c t 9

Posttest Experimental

I. 1. 93% I. 1. 75%
2. 100% 2. 75%
3. 75% 3. 86%
II. 4. 88% 4. 60%
5. 100% II. 5. 81%
6. 83% 6. 100%
7. 78% 7. 67%
III. 8. 94% 8. 00%
9. 83% III. 9. 88%
10. 100% 10. 62%
IV. 11. 92% IV. 11. 67%
12. 73% 12. 62%
13. 82% 13. 00%
V. 14. 100% V. 14. 93%
VI. 15. 100% 15. 100%
V II. 16. 94% 16. 50%
17. 100% VI. 17. 91%
18. 92% 18. 86%
19. 00% V II. 19. 89%
V III. 20. 71% 20. 69%
21. 80% 21. 91%
22. 100% 22. 28%
IX. 23. 100% V II I . 23. 73%
24. 90% 24. 100%
25. 83% 25. 91%
26. 85% 26. 100%
X. 27. 100% IX. 27. 100%
28. 100% 28. 90%
29. 100% 29. 67%
30. 75% 30. 75%
31. 75%
Overall Agreement: 90% 32. 00%
33. 92%

Overall Agreement: 76%

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
S u b je c t 10

P r e te s t Experim ental

I. 1. 82% I. 1. 94%
2. 86% 2. 94%
3. 83% 3. 94%
II. 4. 95% II. 4. 100%
5. 100% III. 5. 100%
6. 50% 6. 90%
III. 7. 90% 7. 83%
8. 81% IV. 8. 92%
IV. 9. 100% 9. 92%
10. 93% V. 10. 100%
V. 11. 100% 11. 100%
12. 00% VI. 12. 93%
VI. 13. 92% V II. 13. 78%
V II. 14. 83% 14. 92%
V III. 15. 100% V III. 15. 93%'
IX. 100% 16. 75%
X. 16. 85% 17. 100%
17. 100% IX. 18. 93%
19. 86%
Overall Agreement: 85% X. 20. 88%
21. 78%
22. 83%

Overall Agreement: 91%

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
S u b je c t 11

Posttest Exp erim en tal •

I. 1. 100% I. 1. 100%
2. 90% 2. 100%
3. 90% 3. 90%
II. 4. 86% II. 4. 100%
III. 5. 80% III. 5. 79%
IV. 6. 71% IV. 6. 79%
V. 7. 100% V. 7. 100%
VI. 8. 75% V I. 8. 83%
9. 100% V II. 9. 69%
V II. 10. 64% V II I . 10. 71%
V II I . 11. 84% XI. 11. 80%
IX. 12. 73% X. 12. 25%
13. 80%
X. 14. 100% Overal1 Agreement:
15. 77%

Overal1 Agreement: 84%

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
S u b je c t 12

Posttest Experimental

I. 1. 79% I. 1. 100%
2. 100% 2. 73%
3. 91% 3. 100%
4. 100% II. 4. 100%
II. 5. 100% 5. 86%
6. 82% III. 6. 94%
7. 82% 7. 100%
8. 92% IV. 8. 77%
III. 9. 94% V. 9. 100%
10. 90% 10. 90%
11. 75% VI. 11. 100%
IV. 12. 83% 12. 90%
13. 80% V II. 13. 91%
V. 14. 92% 14. 100%
15. 92% 15. 90%
16. 75% V II I . 16. 93%
VI. 17. 90% 17. 90%
18. 100% IX. 18. 100%
19. 90% X. 19. 92%
20. 73% 20. 90%
V II. 21. 100% 21. 67%
22. 100%
V III. 23. 90% Overall Agreement: 91%
24. 90%
IX. 25. 88%
26. 100%
27. 90%
X. 28. 90%
29. 100%
30. 80%
31. 70%
32. 80%

Overall Agreement: 90%

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
GROUP I I I

Subject 13.

Pretest Experimental

I. 1. 80% I. 1. 92%
2. 100% 2. 100%
II. 3. 92% II. 3. 89%
4. 94% III. 4. 89%
III. 5. 91% 5. 77%
6. 79% IV. 6. 100%
IV. 7. 100% 7. 80%
V. 8. 100% V. 8. 100%
VI. 9. 91% 9. 93%
V II. 10. 81% VI. 10. 93%
V III. 11. 78% V II. 11. 93%
IX. 100% 12. 100%
X. 12. 100% V II I. 13. 86%
13. 92% IX. 100%
14. 90% X. 14. 90%
15. 92%
Overall Agreement: 91% 16. 100%

Overall Agreement: 92%

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
S u b je c t 14

P o s tte s t Experimental

I. 1. 96% I. 1. 83%
2. 80% 2. 91%
II. 3. 67% 3. 100%
III. 4. 86% II. 4. 85%
5. 85% 5. 100%
6. 91% 6. 100%
IV. 7. 75% IV. 7. 80%
V. 8. 100% V. 8. 100%
VI. 9. 87% VI. 9. 83%
V II. 10. 88% V II. 10. 94%
V III. 11. 00% V III. 11. 78%
12. 69% 12. 73%
IX. 13. 83% 13. 00%
X. 14. 100% IX. 14. 93%
15. 100% 15. 83%
16. 81% X. 16. 90%
17. 83% 17. 93%
18. 92% 18. 100%
19. 70%
Overall Agreement: 85%
Overal1 Agreement: 84%

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
S u b je c t 15

Posttest Experimental

I. 1. 89% I. 1. 93%
II. 2. 64% 2. 71%
III. 3. 82% II. 3. 100%
IV. 4. 76% 4. 73%
V. 5. 100% III. 5. 76%
VI. 6. 85% 6. 73%
V II . 7. 82% IV. 7. 93%
V III . 8. 82% V. 8. 100%
IX. 9. 80% 9. 92%
X. 10. 65% VI. 10. 74%
V II. 11. 88%
Overal1 Agreement: 81% V II I . 12. 89%
IX. 13. 93%
X. 14. 79%

Overall Agreement: 83

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
S u b je c t 16

P re te s t Experimental

I. 1. 82% I. 1. 94%
II. 2. 81% 2. 100%
III. 3. 100% II. 3. 81%
IV. 4. 100% III. 4. 100%
5. 82% IV. 5. 74%
V. 6. 100% V. 6. 100%
VI. 7. 67% V I. 7. 90%
V II. 100% 8. 86%
V III. 8. 100% V II 9. 82%
IX. 9. 75% V III. 10. 93%
X. 10. 100% IX. 11. 77%
11. 92% X. 12. 100%
13. 86%
Overall Agreement: 89%
Overall Agreement: 89%

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
S u b je c t 17

Posttest Experimental

I. 1. 100% I. 1. 100%
2. 100% 2. 100%
3. 100% II. 3. 88%
II. 4. 89% 4. 100%
5. 92% III. 5. 94%
III. 6. 83% IV. 6. 86%
7. 88% V. 7. 100%
IV. 8. 88% 8. 100%
9. 94% V. 9. 100%
10. 85% V II. 10. 94%
11. 100% 11. 94%
VI. 12. 86% V III. 12. 95%
V II. 13 88% IX. 13. 95%
14. 100% X. 14. 71%
15. 75% 15. 100%
V II I . 16. 93% . 16. 100%
17. 73% 17. 100%
IX. 18. 100%
19. 69% Overall Agreement:
20. 81%
X. 21. 69%
22. 93%
23. 100%
24. 91%

Overall Agreement: 89%

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
108
S u b je c t 18

P r e te s t E xp erim en tal

I. 1. 94% I. 1. 70%
2. 93% 2. 100%
3. 60% II. 3. 80%
4. 100% 4. 75%
II. 5. 67% III. 5. 93%
6. 63% 6. 80%
7. 82% 7. 100%
III. 8. 92% IV. 8. 54%
9. 57% 9. 92%
10. 69% V. 10. 92%
IV. 11. 100% 11. 93%
12. 75% VI. 12. 100%
13. 80% 13. 90%
14. 00% V II. 14. 100%
V. 15. 73% 15. 62%
16. 93% V II. 16. 100%
17. 100% 17. 100%
18. 90% IX. 18. 91%
VI. 19. 69% 19. 89%
20. 92% 20. 100%
21. 79% 21. 90%
22. 100% X. 22. 92%
23. 90% 23. 100%
V II. 24. 63% 24. 92%
25. 100%
V III. 26. 89% Overall Agreement: 90%
27. 91%
28. 100%
29. 70%
IX. 30. 77%
X. 31. 00%
32. 100%
33. 80%
34. 100%
35. 100%

Overall Agreement: 83%

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
S u b je c t 19

Pretest Experimental

I. 1. 92% I. 1. 83%
2. 85% 2. 00%
II. 3. 88% II. 3. 91%
4. 100% 4. 83%
III. 5. 90% III. 5. 92%
6. 100% 6. 92%
IV. 7. 93% 7. 100%
V. 8. 100% IV. 8. 73%
VI. 9. 86% V. 9. 100%
V II. 10. 83% VI. 10. 92%
V III. 11. 76% V II. 11. 83%
IX. 12. 75% V III. 12. 79%
X. 13. 92% IX. 13. 79%
14. 100% 14. 100%
15. 82% 15. 83%
16. 100% 16. 92%
17. 90%
Overall Agreement: 85%
Overall Agreement: 89%

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
S u b je c t 20

P r e s te s t E xp erim en tal

I. 1. 93% I. 1. 90%
II. 2. 88% 2. 79%
III. 3. 89% 3. 00%
4. 84% II. 4. 77%
IV. 5. 87% 5. 80%
6. 80% III. 6. 83%
V. 7. 62% 7. 89%
VI. 8. 100% IV. 8. 79%
9. 75% V. 9. 93%
V II. 10. 67% VI. 10. 80%
11. 00% 11. 79%
V II I . 12. 83% V II. 12. 86%
IX. 13. 85% 13. 82%
14. 68% X. 14. 93%
15. 100%
Overall Agreement: 80% IX. 16. 76%
X. 17. 60%
18. 00%

Overall Agreement: 78%

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
S u b je c t 21

P r e te s t Exp erim en tal

I. 1. 82% I. 1. 79%
2. 83% II. 2. 71%
II. 3. 86% III. 3. 60%
III. 4. 78% IV. 4. 88%
IV. 5. 85% V. 5. 82%
V. 6. 86% VI. 6. 100%
VI. 7. 100% VI. 7. 78%
8. 70% V III. 8. 83%
V II. 9. 77% IX. 9. 81%
V III. 10. 79% X. 10. 37%
IX. 11. 92%
X. 12. 29% Overall Agreement: 75%

Overall Agreement: 74%

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
S u b je c t 22

P re te s t ' E xp erim en tal

I. 1 . 100% I. 1 . 100%
2. 75% 2. 79%
3. 71% 3. 77%
4. 87% II. 4. 75%
5. 79% 5. 100%
II. 6. 73% III. 6. 100%
7. 62% 7. 94%
8. 90% IV. 100%
9. 79% V. 8. 100%
10. 100% 9. 92%
III. 11. 95% VI. 10. 85%
12. 77% 11. 69%
13. 90% V II. 12. 93%
IV. 14. 92% V III. 13. 92%
15. 92% 14. 92%
16. 75% IX. 15. 88%
17. 92% 16. 80%
18. 80% X. 17. 100%
V. 19. 81% 18. 100%
20. 78% 19. 92%
21. 92%
VI. 22. 75% Overall Agreement:
23. 92%
24. 100%
25. 80%
26. 92%
V II. 27. 89%
28. 72%
29. 70%
30. 94%
31. 83%
32. 75%
IX. 33. 78%
34. 77%
35. • 87%
X. 36. 100% :
37. 100%
38. 93%
39. 81%

Overall Agreement: 85%

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
S u b je c t 23

P o s tte s t Experim ental

I. 1. 79% I. 1. 92%
2. 86% 2. 100%
3. 93% II. 3. 61%
II. 4. 75% 4. 55%
5. 71% III. 5. 88%
III. 6. 89% 6. 00%
7. 100% 7. 100%
8. 90% IV. 8. 76%
9. 100% V. 9. 87%
IV. 10. 80% 10. 73%
V. 11. 88% VI. 11. 80%
12. 64% 12. 83%
13. 83% 13. 100%
VI. 14. 86% 14. 90%
15. 100% 15. 83%
16. 100% 16. 92%
17. 92% 17. 81%
V II. 18. 78% V III. 18. 80%
19. 100% 19. 73%
20. 81% 20. 80%
V III. 21. 84% 21. 67%
22. 100% IX. 22. 87%
23. 62% 23. 87%
IX. 24. 80% 24. 50%
25. 67% 25. 82%
X. 26. 18%
Overall Agreement: 81%
Overall Agreement: 79%

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
S u b je c t 24

P o s tte s t Experim ental

I. 1. 88% I. 1. 93%
II. 2. 100% II. 2. 92%
III. 3. 92% III. 3. 83%
IV. 4. 100% IV. 100%
V. 5. 92% V. 4. 100%
VI. 6. 85% VI. 100%
V II. 7. 87% V II. 5. 88%
V III. 8. 100% V II I . 6. 100%
9. 100% IX. 100%
IX. 10. 82% X. 7. 91%
X. 11. 83%
Overall Agreement: 97%
Overall Agreement: 92%

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
1,15
APPENDIX I

RORSCHACH SEQUENCE.OF SCORES AND STRUCTURAL .SUMMARY FOR EACH SUBJECT


DURING WAKING (PRE/POST) AND EXPERIMENTAL SESSIONS

Sequence of Scores Subject 1 Pre


Group I

Card RT No. Location Determinants) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 7" 1 Do Fo A
I I 30" 2 Do FTo A
3 Do FT. FYo A P
III 5" 4 Do Mpo (2) H P 3.0
5 Do Fo A
IV 5“ 6 Ddo Fo (2) eg
7 Do FVo Ge
V 5“ 8 Wo FMpo A P 1.0
9 Do FMpo (2) Ad
VI 17" Rejection
V II 10" 10 Do F§ (2) A P
11 Ddo mf.CFo Ex
IX 40" 12 D+ Mo (2) H,A 3.0
X 6" 13 Do Fo (2) A P
14 Dd- F- Xy,Hd

Reproduced with permission from John E. Exner, J r ., Ph.D.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
1,16
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 1 Pre
Group I

R=15 Z f= 3 ZSum=7 P=5 ( 2)=6

L o c a tio n F eatu res Determi nants Contents Contents


(Blends F irs t) (Idiographic)

W = 1 H= 2 Bl= .......................=
FI * FYn
(H) = Bt=
m *CFo 0 .......................=
D = 10 Hd = 1 Cg=l
(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = 3 M = 2 A= 8 Ex=l =
FM = 2 (A) = Fi=
S = m = Ad = 1 Fd= s
C = (Ad) = Ge=l
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= =
CF = A1 = Ls=
FC = An = Na= ......................... =
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay Xy=l
+ = 1 + = FC‘ = S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 12 o = 2 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
V = w= TF = 0 Col.Shd B1 > 0 DV
_ = 1 - = FT = 1 0 3r+(2)/R * .30 INCOM =
no V = +Zd >+3.5 FABCOM =
form = VF = +ep > EA ALOG
FV = 1 +CF+C FC CONTAM =
Form Quality Y = OX+% < .70
YF = OS 3 CP
FQx FQf FY = OP < 3 or r \8 MOR
+ = + = rF = OH* 2 PER
o = 13 o = 5 Fr = + R * 17 PSV
w= w= FD = 4^ Total Total = 0
- = 1 - = 1 F = 6
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 7-6 FC:CF=C = 0:1 Afr =5/9=.56


Zd = 1.0 W:M = 1:2 3r+(2)/R=6/15=.40
EB = 2:1 EA=3.0 W:D = 1:10 Cont:R =8:15
eb = 3:3 ep=6.0 L = 6/8=.75 H+Hd:A+Ad=3:9
(FM=2 m=l T=2 C'= V=1 Y= F+% =5/6 83% (H)+(Hd): (A)+(Ad)=
Blends:R = 2.15 X+% =13/14=93% H+A:HD+Ad=10:2
a:p = 2:3 A% =9/14=64% XRT Achrom=44/5=8.8“
Ma:Mp = 1:1 XRTChrom=91/5=18.2"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
V I7
Sequence o f Scores S u b je c t 1 E xp erim en tal
Group I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 6" 1 Wo Fo (2) A
2 Wv rFw Finger
Painting
I I 9" 3 D- F- Ad
I I I 6" 4 Do Mpo H P
IV 49" Rejection
V 7" 5 Ddo Fw (2) Hair clip
VI 13" Rejection
V II 26" 6 D+ Mpo (2) H P
V III 28" 7 Dd- F- Airplane
IX 3" Rejection
X 23" 8 Do Fw (2) A
9 Do FCo (2) A P
10 Ddo FCo (2) A

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
118
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 1 Experim ental
Group I

R=10 Zf=l ZSum=3.0 P=3 (2)=6

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


- (Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 2 H=2 Bl= Finger Paintings


(H) = Bt=
D = 5 Hd = cg= Hair Clip..........=!
(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = 3 M = 2 A=4 Ex= Airplane............=:
FM = (A) = Fi=
S = m = Ad = 1 Fd= .......................=
C = (Ad) = Go=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= =
CF = 2 A1 = Ls=
FC = An = Na= =
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay xy= =
+ = 1 + = FC' = S-Constellation (Adult)
o=6 o=2 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = 1 w= TF = U Col.Shd B1 5" 0 DV
_ = 2 FT = 0 3r+(2)/R < .30 INCOM =
no V = *Zd>+3.5 FABCOM =
form = VF = Oep > EA ALOG
FV = TJCF+C > FC CONTAM =
Form Quality Y = +X+% < .7 0
YF = 0S > 3 CP
FQx FQf FY = UP < 3 o r> 8 i MOR
+ = + = rF = 1 UH < 2 PER = 2
o=5 o = l Fr = +R < 17 PSV
w= 3 w= 2 FD = Total Total = 2
- = 2 - = 2 F = 5
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 3.0 -,* FC:CF=C = 2 :0 Afr = 4/6=.67


Zd W:M = 2:2 3r+(2)/R= 9/10=.9
EB = 1:1 EA = 2 W:D = 2:5 Cont:R =6:10
eb =0 ep = 0 L = 5/5=1.00 H+Hd:A+Ad=2:5
(FM= m= T= C'=: V= y= ) F+% = 1/5=20% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)
Blends:R = 0:10 X+% = 5/10=50% H+A:HD+Ad=6:l
a:p = 0:2 A% = 5/10=50% XRT Achrom =
101/5 = 20.2"
Ma:Mp = 0:2 XRT Chrom =
69/5 = 13.8"

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
1,19
Sequence o f Scores S u b je c t 2 Pre
Group I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s ) Content(s) POP Z Score

I 3" 1 Wo Fo A P 1.0
II 8" 2 Do FVo (2) A P 4.5
3 Do Fo A
III 20" 4 D+ vP o (2) H P 3.0
IV 20" 5 Wv Ink Blot 2.0
Fwa
V 5" 6 W+ FM o A, Fd P 1.0 FABCOM
VI 28" Rejection
V II 13" 7 W+ Mpo (2) H, paper P 2.5
weight
V III 18" 8 D+ FMa A P 3.0
9 W+ Fro Ls
IX 46" Wv C Painting/ 5.5
modern art
X 25" 11 Dd- F- An 5.5

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
120
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 2 Pre
Group I

R = ll Z f= 9 ZSum=28 P=6 (2)=3

L o c a tio n F eatu res Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irs t) (Idiographic)

W = 6 H= 2 Bl= ink b lo t............=1


(H) = Bt=
D = 4 Hd = Cg= paper w eig h t...=1
(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = 1 M = 2 A= 5 Ex= Painting/modern art=l
FM = 2 (A) = Fi=
S = m = Ad = 1 Fd=l ........................=
C = 1 (Ad) = Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= ....................... =
CF = A1 = Ls=l
FC = An = Na= ........................=
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay Xy= ......................... =
+ = 5 + = FC‘= S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 3 o = 2 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = 2 w= TF = OCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV
- = 1 FT = U3r+(2)/R < .30 INCOM =
no V = 0Zd>+3.5 FABCOM = 1
form = VF = Oep > EA ALOG
FV = 1 +CF+C> FC CONTAM =
Form Quality Y = OX+% < .70
YF = 0S>3 CP
FQx FQf FY = 0P < 3 o r > 8 MOR
+ = + = rF = OH < 2 PER
o = 8 0=1 Fr = 1 +R <. 17 PSV
w= 1 w= 2 FD = I Total Total = 1
- = 1 - = 2 F = 4
no
form =
Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 28-27.5 FC:CF=C = 0 :1 Afr = 4/7=.57


Zd = .5 W:M = 6:2 3r+(2)/R= 6 /ll= .5 5
EB = 2:1 EA = 3 W:D = 6:4 Cont:R = 8:11
eb = 2:1 ep = 3 L = 4/7=.57 H+Hd:A+Ad=2:5
(FM=2 m= T= C‘ = V=1 Y= ) F+% = 2/4=50% (H)+(Hd): (A)+(Ad)=
Blends:R = 0:11 X+% = 8/10=80% H+A:HD+Ad=7:0
a:p = 2:2 A% = 5/11=45% XRT Achrom =
69/5=13.8"
Ma:Mp = 0 :2 XRT Chrom =
117/5=23.4"

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Sequence o f Scores S u b je c t 2 Experim ental
Group I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score

I 5" 1 Wo FC'o A P 1.0


2 Ddo Fw (Hd)
I I 28" 3 D+ FMp.iFTo A (P) 3.0
4 Do FCo A
5 Do Fw Hd
III 5" 6 Do Fwa
Hd
7 Dd+ FM o (2) Ad 4.0
8 Do FCo (2) An
9 Do FC'o (2) H
IV 28" 10 Wo FC'o A
V 2" 11 Wo FC'o A P 1.0
VI 9" 12 Do FTo Ad P
V II 7" 13 Do Fo (2) A
14 Do Foa
(2) A
V III 15" 15 D+ FM 'TFo A, Ls P 3.0
16 Ddo F- Mask
17 Ddo FCo A
IX 3" 18 Ddo Fo (2) Ad
19 D- F- Doll
X 10" 20 D- F- A
21 Do FCw (2) A
22 Do FCo (.2) Bt
23 Do Fo (2) A
24 Do Fo Bt

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
122
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY Subject 2 Experimental
Group I

R=24 Zf=5 ZSum=12 P=4 (2)=10

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 3 FMp.FTo H= 1 Bl= Mask................. =1


FM .TFo (H) = Bt=
D = 16 Hd = 2 Cg= D oll................. =1
(Hd) =1 Cl=
Dd = 5 M = A = 12 Ex=
FM = 1 (A) = Fi=
S = m = Ad = 3 Fd=
C = (Ad) = Go=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh=
CF = A1 = Ls=
FC = 5 An = 1 Na= ......................... =
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx=
C‘ F= Ay Xy=
+ = 3 + = FC*= 4 S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 19 o = T = 0FV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = w= TF = 0 Col.Shd B1 > 0 DV
_ = 2 FT = 1 0 3r+(2)/R < .3 0 INC0M =
no V = 0Zd>+3.5 FABCOM =
form = VF = +ep > EA ALOG
FV = 0CF+C ^ FC CONTAM =
Form Quality Y = TJX+% < .7 0
YF = 0S > 3 CP
FQx FQf FY = 0P < 3 o r> 8 MOR
+ = + = rF = 1 OH < 2 PER
o = 17 o = 5 Fr = +R < 1 7 PSV
w= 4 w= 3 FD = 7 Total Total = 0
- = 3 - = 3 F = 11
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 1 2 - 1 0 FC: CF=C = 5:0 Afr = 10/14=.71


zd = 2.0 W:M = 3:0 3r+(2)/R= 10/24=.42
EB = 0:2.5 EA = 2.5 W:D = 3:16 Cont:R = 10:24
eb =3:7 ep = 10.0 L = 11/13=.85 H+Hd:A+Ad=l:15
(FM=3 m= T=3 C'=4 V= Y= ) F+% = 5/11=45% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
1:0
Blends:R = 2 :2 4 X+% = 17/24=71% H+A:HD+Ad=14.3
a:p = 2:1 A% = 15/24=63% XRT Achrom =
51/5=10.2"
Ma:Mp = 0:0 XRT Chrom =
61/5=12.2"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
123
Sequence o f Scores S u b je c t 3 Pre
Group I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score

I 2“ 1 Wo FM o A P 1.0
2 Do Fo A
II 6" 3 W,So FCw Mask, (H) 4.5
4 D,So mo Rocket, Fi 4.5
III 9" 5 W+ M . FC. m + H 5.5

IV 6" 6 Do
M D
FD,Mp.FTo (H) P
V 8" 7 Wo FMpo A P 1.0
VI 9“ 8 Do Fo Ad
9 Do Fo Ad
V II 9" 10 Dv Fo (2) Cl
V III 21" 11 Do Fw (2) A
12 Do Fo Hd
13 Do F- . H
• 14 Do CFo Ls
IX 2" 15 Do Mpo (2) (H)
X 15" 16 Ddo FCo (2) A P INCOM
17 D.So Fw A 6.0
18 Do Fo (2) A
19 Do Fo (2) Bt

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
124
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 3 ? re
Group 1

R=19 Zf=6 ZSum=22.5 P=4

L o c a tio n F e a tu re s Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irs t) (IdiograpJsic)

W = 4 MaFC.,ma+ H =2 Bl= Mask...------ = 1


FD.Mh.FTo (H) = 3 Bt=l
D = 14 Hd = i Cg= Rocket......... = 1
(Hd.)= Cl=i
Dd = 1 M = 1 A =7 Ex=
FM = 2 (A) « Fi=i
m = Ad •= Fd= =
S = 3 1
C = (Ad)= Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh=
CF = 1 A1 = Ls=I
FC = 2 An = Jia=
DQ M Quality C‘ = Art = Sx=
C*F= Ay = Xy=i ............................. =
+ = 1 + = 1 FC:= S-Constel1ation fftsult)
o = 17 o = 2 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
V = 1 W = TF = OCol.Shd B1 > 0 D¥
~ — - = FT = I[3r+(2)/R < .30 IHCOM = 1
no V = +Zd>_+3.5 FABCQM =
form = VF = Oep EA ALOG
FV = OCF+C > FC CONTAM =
Form Quality Y = CX+% < .7 0
YF = 0S > 3 CP
FQx FQf FY = OP < 3 o r > 8 MGR
+ = 1 + = rF = OH < 2 PER
o = 14 o = 7 Fr = ^R < 1 7 PSV
w= 3 w= 2 FD = 1 Total Total - 1
- = 1 - = 1 F = 10
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 22.5-17 FC:CF=C = 2 :1 Afr =9/10=.90


Zd = 5.5 W:M = 4 :3 3r+(2)/R= /I9=-37
EB = 3:3 EA=5.0 W:D = 4 :1 4 Cont:R =11:19
eb = 4 :1 ep=5.Q L = 10/9=1.11 H+Hd:A+Ad=3:9
(FM=2 m=2 T=1 C*= V= Y= ) F+% = 7/3=78% (H)+(Hd):(AH(Ad)=3:0
Blends:R = 2 :1 9 X+% =15/19=79% H+A:HD+Ad=12:3
a:p = 4 :3 k% =9/19=47% XRTAchrom=34/5=5.8"
Ma:Mp = 1:2 XRTChrcm=53/5=10.6"

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
125
Sequence o f Scores S u b je c t 3 Experim ental
Group I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 30" 1 Wv mpw Blob 1.0


2 Do Fw (2) Ad
II 12" 3 Wo Fw Mask 4.5
III 8" 4 Wo FMpw Ad 5.5
IV 15" 5 Wo FM.'ftto (H) 2.0
V 10" 6 Wo FMHo A P 1.0 MOR
VI 26" 7 Do Fo A MOR
V II 10" 8 Wv Fo Cl 2.5
V III 11" Rejection
IX 16" 9 D+ Mo (2) (H) 4.5
X 11" 10 Wv CFw Shapes
11 Do FCo (2) Bt PERS,DV

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
126
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 3 Experim ental
Group I

R = ll Z f=7 ZSum=19 P=1 (2)=3

L o catio n F eatures Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 7 FMp*mpo H= Bl= Blob............ . .,=1


(H) =2 Bt=l
Hd = Cg= Mask............ ...= 1
4*
o
ii

(Hd) = Cl=l
Dd = M = 1 A= 2 Ex= Shapes........ .. ,=1
FM = 1 (A) = Fi=
S = m = 1 Ad = 2 Fd=
C = (Ad) = Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh=
CF = 1 A1 = Ls=
FC = 1 An = Na= =
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx=
C*F= Ay xy=
+ = 1 + = FC' = S-Constellation (Adult)
o=7 o = l T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = 3 w= TF = 0 Col.Shd B1 > 0 DV = 1
FT = + 3r+(2)/R < .3 0 INCOM =
no V = £Zd>+3.5 FABCOM
form = VF = +ep> EA ALOG =
FV = OCF+C > FC CONTAM s
Form Quality Y = +X+% < .7 0
YF = OS > 3 CP s
FQx FQf FY = +P 4 3 o r> 8 MOR = 2
+ = + = rF = OH ^ 2 PER = 1
o = 6 o= 2 Fr = +R < 1 7 PSV =
w= 5 w= 2 FD = 5_ Total Total = 4
_ = - = F = 4
no
form =
Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 19-20.5 FC:CF=C 1:1 Afr = 3/8=.38


Zd -1.5 W:M 7:1 3r+(2)/R= 3/ll= .2 7
EB 1:15 EA = 2.5 W:D 7:4 Cont:R = 8:11
eb 4:0 ep = 4.0 L 4/7=.57 H+Hd:A+Ad=0:4
(FM=2 m=2 T= C'= V= Y= F+% 2/4=50% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
2:0
Blends:R = 1:11 X+% 6/11=55% H+A:HD+Ad=4:2
a:p = 1:5 A% 4/11=36% XRT Achrom =91/5=
18.2"
Ma:Mp = 1:0 XRT Chrom =
58/5=11.6"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
127

Sequence o f Scores S u b je c t 4 E xp erim en tal


Group I

Card RT No. Locatii

I 1" 1 Wv Y.C'w Ink 1.0


2 D+ FM w (2) A 6.0
3 Ddo Fo (2) Hd
4 Ddo FMpw A
II 3" 5 Wo CFo (2) A,B1 4.5 INC0M,M0R
6 D,S+ Mo Rocket Ship, 4.5
Fi
III 7“ 7 Do F” A
8 D+ Mpg (2) H P 3.0
9 Ddo FM w (2) A
IV 8“ 10 Wo Fw A 2.0
V 5" 11 W,So Fw A P 1.0
VI 38" 12 Wo Fg (A) 2.5
V II 2" 13 D+ Ho (2) H P 3.0
V III 4" 14 W+ FM o (2) A,Ls P 4.5
IX 23" 15 Dd- CF.M - (2) (H),Bubbles 2.5
X 2" 16 Do Fo (2) A P
17 Do Fo. (2) A
18 Do FM®o (2) A
19 Do FMpw (2) A
20 D+ FM o (2) A,Bt

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
128
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 4 Exp erim en tal
Group I

R=20 Z f= ll ZSum=34.5 P=5 (2)=13

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irs t) (Idiographic)

W = 6 Y.C'w H= 2 Bl=l Ink................. =1


CF.M - (H) = Bt=l
D = 10 Hd =1 Cg= Rocket Shi p ..=1
(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = 4 M = 2 A = 13 Ex= Bubbles..........=1
FM = 7 (A) = 1 Fi=l
S = 2 m = 1 Ad = Fd= =
C = (Ad) = Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= ......................... =
CF = 1 A1 = Ls=l
FC = An = Na= =:
DQ M Quality C1 = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay xy=
+ = 6 + = FC1= S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 12 o = 2 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = 1 w= TF = + Col.Shd B1 > 0 DV
- = 1 - = 1 FT = 0 3r+(2)/R < .30 INCOM = 1
no V = 0zd>+3.5 FABCOM =
form = VF = +ep> EA ALOG
FV = +CF+C > FC CONTAM =
Form Quality Y = +X+% < .7 0
YF = 0S > 3 CP
FQx FQf FY = OP < 3 or > 8 MOR = 1
+ = + = rF = OH <c2 PER
o = 11 o= 4 Fr = 1JR <17 PSV
w= 7 w= 2 FD = £ Total Total = 2
- = 2 - = 1 F = 7
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 34.5--34.5 FC:CF=C = 0:2 Afr = 7/13=.54


zd = 0 W:M = 6:3 3r+(2)/R= 13/20=.65
EB = 3:2 EA = 5 W:D = 6:10 Cont:R = 11:20
eb = 8:2 ep = 10 L = 7/13=.54H+Hd:A+Ad=3:14
(FM=7 m=l T= C' = 1 V= Y=l) F+% = 3/6=50% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
0:1
Blends:R = 2:20 X+% = 11/20=55% H+A:HD+Ad=16:l
a:p = 8:3 A% = 14/20=70% XRT Achrom =54/5=
10.8"
Ma:Mp = 2:1 XRT Chrom =
39/5=7.8

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
1.29
Sequence o f Scores S u b je c t 4 Post
Group I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 27" 1 Ddo Fo An
2 Ddo FMpo Ad
II 36" 3 Do FMpO (2) A P
III 10" 4 Do Mao (2) H P 3.0
IV 10“ 5 Do Fo A 2.0
V 5" 6 Mo Fo A P 1.0
VI 22" 7 Ddo Fo An
8 Wo Fo A
V II 5" 9 Do Fo (2) H P
10 Do An
FY§ 3.0
V III 16" 11 Do FM o (2) A
12 Do Fo A
IX 27" Rejection
X 43" 13 Do Fo (2) A P
14 Do Fo A
15 Do (2) A
F° a
16 Do FM w A

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
1.30
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY Subject 4 Post
Group I

R=16 Zf=4 ZSum=9 P=5 (2)=6

Location Features Determi nants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 2 H= 2 Bl= ............... =
(H) = Bt=
D = 11 Hd = cg= ....................... =
(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = 3 M = 1 A = 10 Ex= —
FM = 4 (A) = Fi=
S = m = Ad = 1 Fd= ......................... =
C = (Ad) = Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= ......................... =
CF = A1 = Ls=
FC = An = 3 Na= ..........................=
DQ M Quality C‘ = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay xy= ......................... =
+ = + = FC' = S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 16 o = l T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = w= TF = 0 Col.Shd B1 > 0 DV
_ s - = FT = 0 3r+(2)/R <•30 INCOM =
no V = 0zd>+3.5 FABCOM =
form = VF = +ep > EA ALOG
FV = OCF+C > FC CONTAM =
Form Quality Y = OX+% < .7 0
YF = 0S > 3 CP
FQx FQf FY = 1 UP < 3 o r> 8 MOR = 1
+ = + = rF = OH < 2 PER
o = 15 o = 10 Fr = +R < 17 PSV
w= 1 w= FD = 2 Total Total = 1
_ = - = F = 10
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 9-10 FC:CF=C = 0:0 Afr = 6/10=.60


Zd = -1 W:M = 2:1 3r+(2)/R= 6/16=.38
EB = 1:0 EA = 1.0 W:D = 2:11 Cont:R = 4:16
eb = 4:1 ep = 5.0 L = 10/6=1.67 H+Hd:A+Ad=2:ll
(FM=4 m= T= C* = V= Y=1 ) F+% = 10/10-100% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
Blends:R = 0:16 X+% = 15/16=94% H+A:HD+Ad=12:l
a:p = 3:2 A% = 10/16=63% XRT Achrom =69/5=
13.8“
Ma:Mp = 1:0 XRT Chrom =
132/5=26.4"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
131
Sequence o f Scores S u b je c t 5 Exp erim en tal
Group I

Card RT No. Locatii Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 1" 1 Do Fo (2) A PER


2 Do Fq A
I I 15" 3 Dd+ MQo n (2) Hd 3.0
4 Do FC.FMpo A
5 W+ Fo (2) A P 4.5
6 Do Fo„ Hh
I I I 15" 7 Do FMpo (2) A 4.0
8 Ddv B1
F8 H
IV 1" 9 Wo M ,FDo 2.0
10 Ddo FM o A
V 43" 11 W+ MP (2) H 1.0 PER
12 Ddo mpo (2) A 2.5 MOR
VI 25" 13 Wo Fo Ad 2.5 PER,M0R
14 Wo Fo Bt
15 Do Fo Arrow
16 Do Funny Pen

V II 2" 17 Do Mo (2) H P 3.0
18 Do Fo A
19 Ddo mao Na 1.0
20 Ddo Fo (2) Fd PER
V III 12" 21 Do Fo A
22 D,So FCo Torn cloth
23 Do Fo (2) A
24 Do Fo Xmas Tree
IX 3" 25 Do FCo (2) (H)
26 Ddo FCo (2) Ad INCOM
27 Do Fo (2) Ad
28 Do Fo (2) Fd
X 2" 29 Do FMpo (2) A P
30 Do Fo (2) Bt
31 Do Fo (2) Fd PER
32 Do FCo tent
33 Do Mpo (2) A

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
132
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 5 Experim ental
Group I

R=33 Zf=9 ZSum=23.5 P=3 (2)=17

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 5 FC.FMpo H= 3 Bl=l Arrow............=1


M . FDo (H) =1 Bt=2
D = 21 Hd =1 Cg= Funny pen...=l
(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = 7 M = 4 A = 12 Ex= Torn c lo th ..=1
FM = 3 (A) = Fi=
S = 1 m = 2 Ad = 3 Fd=3 Tent............. =1
C = (Ad) = Go=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh=l Xmas tr e e ...= l
CF = A1 = Ls=
FC = 4 An = Na=l =
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx=
C‘ F= Ay Xy= .......................=
+ = 3 + = FC' = S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 29 o = 5 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
V = 1 W = TF = 0 Col.Shd B1 > 0 DV
_ = - = FT = 0 3r+(2)/R < .3 0 INCOM = 1
no V = +Zd>+3.5 FABCOM =
form = VF = Oep > EA ALOG
FV = OCF+C > FC CONTAM =
Form Quality Y = TTX+% < .70
YF = 0S> 3 CP
FQx FQf FY = OP ^ 3 o r > 8 MOR = 2
+ = + = rF = OH < 2 PER = 4
o = 33 o = 18 Fr = OR < 1 7 PSV
w= w= FD = _1 Total = 7
F = 18
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 23.5-27.5 ' FC:CF=C = 4:0 Afr = 13/20=.65


Zd = -4.0 W:M = 5:5 3r+(2)/R= 17/33=.52
EB = 5:2 EA = 7.0 W:D = 5:21 Cont:R = 15:33
eb = 5:0 ep = 6.0 L = 18/15=1.2 H+Hd:A+Ad=4:15
(FM=4 m=2 T= C'= V= Y= ) F+% = 18/18=100% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
1:0
Blends:R = 2:33 X+% = 33/33=100% H+A:HD+Ad=16:4
a:p = 5:6 A% = 15/33=45% XRT Achrom =72/5=
14.4"
Ma:Mp = 3:2 XRT Chrom =
47/5=9.4"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
133
Sequence o f Scores S u b je c t 5 Post
Group I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I13" 1 Ddo Fo (2) A


2 Do *7° A
I I 10" 3 D+ Mao (2) H
4 D,So mo Space Ship,
Fi 3.0
5 Do Fo A
6 Dd,So FC'o (2) Hd
I I I 15" 7 Do Fo A
8 Dd,So Fo Bt
9 Dd,So Fo, A
10 Do FM w A
IV 9" 11 Wo FM .FDo A 2.0
12 Dd,S+ Mp+ (2) H 5.0
V 5" 13 Wo FMao A P 1.0
14 D,So Mpw (2) H
15 Dd,S+' Mo (2) Hd
16 Do Fo Hd
17 Do Fo (2) Ad
VI 5" 18 Wo Fo A P 2.5
19 Ddo Fo An
20 Do Fo Pen
21 Do Fo Hh
22 D+ FMpo (2) A 2.!
V II 8" 23 Dd+ Mo (2) H P 3.1
24 D,So Fo (2) A P
V III 7 25 Do Fo (2) A P
26 D,So Fo eg
27 Ddo Fo (2) Hd,Cg
28 Do Fo An
29 Ddo Fo Bt
IX 26" 30 Do Fo (2) A
31 Ddo Fo (2) Ad
32 Ddo Fw A
33 Do Fw Hd
34 Do • Fw Hh
X 8" 35 Do FCo (2) Bt
36 Do FDo An
37 Dd,So mp+ Statue
38 Do FCo (2) A
39 Ddo Fo Peach Pits

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
,134
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 5 Post
Group I

R=39 Zf=7 ZSum=19 P=5 (2)=16

L o c a tio n F eatu res Determi nants Contents Contents


(Blends First) (Idiographic)

W = 3 FMa.FDo H= 4 Bl = Spaceship. =1
(H) = Bt=3
D = 22 Hd =5 Cg=2 Pen............ =1
(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = 14 M 5 A = 15 Ex= Statue___ =1
FM 3 (A) = Fi=l
S = 10 m 2 Ad = 2 Fd= Peach p it. =1
C (Ad) = Go=
DW = Cn Ab = Hh=2
CF A1 = Ls=
FC = 2 An = 3 Na=
DQ M Quality C' ’ Art = Sx=
C‘ F Ay Xy=
+ = 5 + - 1 FC' = 1 S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 34 o = 3 T OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = w= 1 TF 'O Col.Shd B1 > 0 DV
FT U3r+(2)/R < -3 0 INCOM = 1
no V 0Zd>+3.5 FABCOM =
form = VF £ep > EA ALOG
FV OCF+C > FC CONTAM =
Form Quality Y OX+% < .7 0
YF +S> 3 CP
FQx FQf FY = 1 OP < 3 or > 8 MOR
+ = 2 + = rF OH < 2 PER
o = 32 o = 20 Fr HR < 1 7 PSV
w= 5 w= 3 FD 1 1 Total Total = 1
F 23
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 19-20.5 FC:CF=C = 2 :0 Afr = 15/24=.63


Zd = -1.5 W:M = 3:5 3r+(2)/R= 16/39=.41
EB = 5:1 EA = 6.0 W:D = 3:22 Cont:R = 13:39
eb = 5:1 ep = 6.0 L = 23/16=1.44 H+Hd:A+Ad =9:17
(FM=3 m=2 T= T' = V= Y=l) F+% = 20/23=87% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
Blends:R = 1:39 X+% = 34/39=87% H+A:HD+Ad =19:7
a:p = 7:4 A% = 17/39=44% XRT Achrom =
40/5 = 8"
Ma:Mp = 3:2 XRT Chrom =
66/5 = 13.2"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
135
Sequence o f Scores S u b je c t 6 Exp erim en tal
Group I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 5" 1 Wo FMpo A 1.0


I I 11" 2 W,So FC.FT.FM w Ad 4.5
3 D+ FM o a A P 3.0
I I I 5" 4 D+ FC' Ma+ (2) H P 3.0 PER
IV 9" 5 Do FMpw Ad
6 Wo Fo (H) 2.0
V 2" 7 Wo Fo A P 1.0
VI 9" 8 Do F§ A
V II 19"1 9 D+ Mo (2) H 3.0
10 Do Fo Rocking PER
chair
V III 5" 11 W+ FMa.CFo (2) A,Ls,Fi 4.5
IX 8" 12 Dd+ mao (2) D oll, Ball 2.5
X 16" 13 W,So M .C- H, magic 5.5
colors

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
136
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 6 Experim ental
Group I

R=13 Z f= 10 ZSum=30 P=3 (2 )= 4

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

w = 6 FC.FT.FM w H= 3 Bl= D oll..............=1


FC'.M + (H) =1 Bt=
D = 6 FM .CFo Hd = Cg= B a ll............. =1
M .C- (Hd) = Cl=
Dd = 1 M = 1 A= 5 Ex= Magic Colors=l
FM = 3 (A) = Fi=l
S = 2 m = 1 Ad = 2 Fd= Rocking chair=l
C = (Ad) = Go=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= =
CF = A1 = Ls=
FC = An = Na= .......................=
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay Xy= ....................... =
+ = 5 + = 1 FC' = S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 8 0 = 1 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = w= TF = 0 Col.Shd B1 > 0 DV
- = - = 1 FT = +3r+(2)/R < .3 0 INCOM =
no V = 0Zd>+3.5 FABCOM =
form = VF = +ep > EA ALOG
FV = +CF+C > FC CONTAM =
Form Quality Y = OX+% < .7 0
YF = 0S > 3 CP
FQx FQf FY = OP < 3 o r> 8 MOR
+ = 1 + = rF = OH < 2 PER = 2
o = 9 o = 4 Fr = +R <17 PS V
w= 2 w= FD = 4 Total Total = 2
- = 1 - = F = 4
no
form :

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 30-31 FC:CF=C = 1:2 Afr = 3/10=.30


zd = -1 W:M = 6:3 3r+(2)/R= 4/13=.31
EB = 3:3 EA = 6 W:D = 6:6 Cont:R = 10:13
eb = 6:2 ep = 8 L = 4/9=.44 H+Hd:A+Ad = 3:7
(FM=5 m=l T=1 C' = 1 V=0 Y=0) F+% = 4/4=100% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
1:0
Blends:R = 4 :1 3 X+% = 10/13=77% H+A:HD+Ad = 9 :2
a:p = 7 :2 A% = 7/13=54% XRT Achrom =
41/5=8.2"
Ma:Mp = 3 :0 XRT Chrom =
45/5=9.0"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
137

Sequence o f Scores S u b je c t 6 Post


Group I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 2" 1 Wo Fo A P 1.0
2 Wo Fo A 1.0
I I 10" 3 W,So Fw Ad 4.5
4 Do (2) (H)
F8
III 10" 5 Do Ho (2) H P
IV 9" 6 Wo Fo (A) 2.0
V 2" 7 Wo Fo A P 1.0
VI 13" 8 Do Fo A
V II 5" 9 Wo Fw Swing 5.5
Set
V III 9" 10 Wo m^.FCo Bt 4.5
IX 11" 11 D+ MPo (2) H 2.5
X 15" 12 Do Fo (2) A P
13 Do Fo (2) Ad

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 6 Post
Group I

R=13 Zf=8 ZSum=22 P=4 (2)=5

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irs t) (Idiographic)

W = 7 ma.FCo H= 2 Bl = Swing S e t...= l


(H) =1 Bt=l
D = 6 Hd = Cg= ..................... =
(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = M = 2 A= 5 Ex=
FM = (A) =1 Fi=
S = 1 m = Ad = 2 Fd= =
C = (Ad) = Go=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh=
CF = A1 = Ls=
FC = An = Na= ....................... =
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay xy=
+ = 1 + = FC'= S-Constellation (Adult)
T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
CM

CM
O
O

II
II

V= W = TF = OCol.Shd B1 >* 0 DV
_ = _ = FT = 03r+(2)/R < .3 0 INCOM =
no V = 0Zd>+3.5 FABCOM =
form = VF = Oep> EA ALOG
FV = 0CF+C> FC CONTAM =
Form Quality Y = UX+% < .70
YF = 0S > 3 CP
FQx FQf FY = OP < 3 o r> 8 M OR
+ = + = rF = OH < 2 PER
o = 11 o=8 Fr = +R < 1 7 PSV
w= 2 w= 2 FD = 1_ Total Total =0
_ = 1 _ = F = 10
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 22-24 FC:CF=C = 1:0 Afr = 4/9=.44


zd = -2.0 W:M = 7:2 3r+(2)/R= 5/13=.38
EB = 2:.5 EA = 2.5 W:D = 7:6 Cont:R = 7 :1 3
eb = 1:0 ep = 1.0 L = 10/3=3.33 H+Hd:A+Ad = 2 :7
(FM= m=l T= C‘= V= Y=) F+% =8/10=80% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
1:1
BlendstR = 1:13 X+% = 11/13=85% H+A:HD+Ad = 8 :3
a:p = 1:1 A% = 7/13=54% XRT Achrom =
31/5=6.2"
Ma:Mp = 1:1 XRT Chrom =
55/5=11"

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
139
Sequence o f Scores S u b je c t 7 Pre
Group I I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 12"1 1 W+ Mpo (2) H 4.0


2 W,So Mask 3.5
W+ F§ 4.5
II 8" 3 M“o (2) (H)
III 21" 4 D+ Mo (2) H ■ P 4.0
IV 5" 5 W- F- (A) 2.0
6 Wo F°a Hd
V 15“ 7 Wo FM o A 1.0
VI 11" 8 Do Fo Something
Indian
9 Wo Mpo (2) (H) P 2.5
V III 37" 10 Do Ff ° a (2) A,Ls P 4.5
IX 15" 11 W+ M .FM o (2) H,A 5.5
X 20" 12 Do n fo (2) A P 4.0
13 D+ FM 0 n (2) A 4.0
14 D+ FC.FMP. (2) A,Ls 4.0
FM o

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
1.40
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 7 Pre
Group I I

R=14 Zf=12 ZSum=43.5 P=5 (2)=9

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 8 Ma.FMao . H= 3 Bl = Mask. .=1


FC.FMp.FMao (H) =2 Bt=
D = 6 Hd =1 Cg= Something...=l
Indian
(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = M = 4 A= 6 Ex=
FM = 4 (A) =1 Fi=
S = 1 m = Ad = Fd=
C = (Ad) = Go=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh=
CF = A1 = Ls=2
FC = An = Na=
DQ M Quality C‘ = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay Xy=
+ = 6 + = FC'= S-Constellation (Adult)
T = 0FV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
O

cn

0 = 7
II

v = w= TF = OCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV
- = 1 - = FT = 03r+(2)/R < .3 0 INCOM =
no V = +Zd^+3.5 FABCOM =
form = VF = +ep > EA ALOG
FV = 0CF+C > FC CONTAM =
Form Quality Y = 0X+% < .70
YF = 0S> 3 CP
FQx FQf FY = OP < 3 o r> 8 MOR
+ = + = rF = OH < 2 PER
PSV
O

CO

Fr = +R < 17
CO

II
II

w= w= FD = 3 Total Total = 0
- = 1 - = 1 F = 4
no
form

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 43.5-38.0 FC:CF=C = 1:0 Afr = 5/9=.56


zd = 5.5 W:M = 8:5 3r+(2)/R= 9/14=.64
EB = 5:.5 EA = 5.5 W:D 8:6 Cont:R = 8:14
eb = 7 :0 ep = 7.0 L = 4/10=.40 H+Hd:A+Ad = 4 :6
(FM=7 m= T= C‘ = V= Y=) F+% 3/4=75% (H)+(Hd): (A)+(Ad)=
1:1
Blends:R = 2:14 X+% 13/14=93% H+A:HD+Ad = 1 2 :1
a:p = 9 :3 A% = 7/14=50% XRT Achrom =
46/5=9.2"
Ma:Mp = 3:2 XRT Chrom =
101/5=20.2"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
141
Sequence o f Scores S u b je c t 7 Exp erim en tal
Group I I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 7" 1 W,So Mask 1.0


F8
II 16" 2 W+ M*o (2) A P 4.5
III 20" 3 D+ Mo (2) H P 3.0
IV 30" 4 W- FC*- Hd 2.0
V 1" 5 Wo Fo A P 1.0
VI 15" 6 Wv Fw Something 2.5
Indian
V II 10" 7 D+ Mpg (2) H,Ice P 3.0
V III 5" 8 Do Ftfo (2) A,Ls P 3.0
IX 10" 9 Ddo Mg (2) (H) 2.5
X 7" 10 D+ FM*o (2) A,Rocks 4.0
11 D+ FM o (2) A,Ls 4.0

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
1.42
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 7 Experim ental
Group I I

R=ll Z f= ll ZSum= 30.5 P=5 (2)=7

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 5 H= 2 Bl= Mask............. =1
(H) =1 Bt=
D = 5 Hd =1 cg= Something...=1
Indian
(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = 1 M = 4 A= 5 Ex= Ice............... =1
FM = 3 (A) = Fi=l
S = m = Ad = Fd=3 Rocks............=1
C = (Ad) = Ge=
Cn = Ab = Hh= —
DW =
CF = A1 = Ls=2
FC = An = Na=
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay xy=
+ = 5 + = FC‘ =1 S-Constellation (Adult)
T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
•‘St-

O
O
11

11

V = 1 w= TF = OCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV
FT = 03r+(2)/R < .3 0 INCOM =
no V = +Zd >j^3.5 FABCOM =
form = VF = +ep > EA ALOG
FV = OCF+C > FC CONTAM =
Form Quality Y = UX+% < .70
YF = 0S> 3 CP
FQx FQf FY = OP < 3 o r> 8 MOR
+ = + = rF = OH * 2 PER
o= 9 o= 2 Fr = +R <17 PSV
w= 1 w= 1 FD = 2_ Total Total = 0
- = 1 F = 3
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 30.5-■34.5 FC:CF=C = 0:0 Afr = 4/7=.57


Zd = -4.0 W:M = 5:4 3r+(2)/R=7/ll=.64
EB = 4:0 EA = 4.0 W:D = 5:5 Cont:R = 9:1
eb = 3:1 ep = 4.0 L = 3/8=.38 H+Hd:A+Ad = 3 :5
(FM=3 m= T= C' =1 V= Y=) F+% = 2/3=67% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
1:0
Blends:R = 0:11 X+% = 9/11=82% H+A:HD+Ad =12:1
a:p = 6:1 A% = 5/11=45% XRT Achrom =
68/5=13.6"
Ma:Mp = 3:1 XRT Chrom =
58/5=11.6"

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
143
Sequence o f Scores S u b je c t 8 Pre
Group I I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 8" 1 W,So Fo A 1.0


2 Ddo A
I I 25" 3 Wo M^o (2) H,B1 3.0
I I I 33" 4 W+ FC.FV.CF.Mpo(2) H P 5.5
IV 6" 5 W- F- A 2.0
6 Wo Fo (A) 2.0
V 8" 7 Wo Fo A 1.0
VI 15" 8 Wo Fo A 2.5
V II 17" 9 Wo Ma,Frw H 2.5
V III 9" 10 W+ FM .CF.Fro A P 4.5
IX 15" 11 Wv CF.TF.m + Na 5.5
X 5" 12 Wo Fw Mask,H,Cg 5.5
13 Do Fo Bt 4.0

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 8 Pre
Group I I

R=13 Zf=I2 ZSum= 39 P=2 (2)=2

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

w = 11 FS' .FV.CF.Mpo H= 4 Bl= 1 Mask........ .. .=1


M Frw (H) = Bt= 1
D = 1 FM .CF.Fro Hd = Cg= 1
CF.TF.m + (Hd) = Cl =
Dd = 1 M = 1 A=6 Ex=
FM = (A) = 1 Fi=
S = m = Ad = Fd=
C = (Ad) = Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh=
CF = A1 = Ls=
FC = An = Na=l
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay = Xy= ~
+ = 2 + = FC‘ = S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 9 o = 2 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = 1 w= 1 TF = OCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV =
- = 1 = - FT = 03r+(2)/R < .3 0 INCOM = 1
no V = 0Zd>+3.5 FABCOM =
form = VF = Oep^ EA ALOG =
FV = +CF+C >• FC CONTAM =
Form Quality Y = 0X+%< .70
YF = 0S-> 3 CP =
FQx FQf FY = +P ^ 3 o r> 8 MOR =
+ = 1 + = rF = OH < 2 PER
o = 9 o = 6 Fr = +R < 17 PSV =
w= 1 w= 1 FD = 3 Total Total = 1
- = 1 - = 1 F = 8
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 39-38 FC:CF+C = 0:3 Afr = 4/9=.44


zd =1 W:M = 11:3 3r+(2)/R=8/13=.62
EB = 3:3 EA = 6 W:D = 11:1 Cont:R = 8:14
eb = 2:3 ep = 5 L = 8/5=1.6 H+Hd:A+Ad = 4:6
(FM=1 m=l T=1 C'=l V=1 Y=) F+% = 6/8=75% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
0:1
Blends:R = 4:13 X+% = 10/13=77%% H+A:HD+Ad = 11:0
a:p = 3:1 A% = 7/13=54% XRT Achrom =
54/5=10.8"
Ma:Mp = 1 :2 XRT Chrom =
87/5=17.4"

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Sequence o f Scores S u b je c t 8 E xperim ental
Group I I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 9" 1 D,So Fo A
2 W.So Fo Ad
I I 2" 3 Wo It .Co (2) H,B1 P 4.5
I I I 10" 4 D+ FY.M .FV+ (2) H P 3.0
5 Do FYo A P
IV 6" 6 Wo (A) 2.0
Fo a
V 7" 7 Wo FC'.FM o A P 1.0
VI 5" 8 Wo FO Ad 2.5
V II 12" 9 Wo M .Fro H P 3.0
V III 13" 10 Wo FM .FC.Fro A,Ls P 4.5 INC0M
11 Wo FCo emblem 4.5
IX 20" 12 Dd,Sv Fw (Ad) 5.5
X 10" 13 Dd,So FCw Hd INC0M
14 W+ FCo B+ 5.5 INC0M

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
1.46
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 8 Experim ental
Group I I

R=14 Zf=10 ZSum= 36 P=6 (2)=2

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 9 FY.IM .FV+ H= 3 Bl= 1 emblem... , ..=1


Bt= 1
FS' .FM o (H) =
D = 3 Mo .Fr Hd = 1 Cg=
FM5.FC.Fro (Hd) = Cl=
M^o.C
Dd = 2 M = A= 4 Ex= —
FM = (A) = 1 Fi=
S = 4 m = Ad = 2 Fd=
C = (Ad) = 1 Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh=
CF = A1 = Ls= 1
FC = 3 An = Na=
DQ M Quality C* = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay = xy=
+ = 2 + = 1 FC' = S-Constellation (Adult)
OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
CvJ

T =
rH
pH

o
O
II

II

v = 1 w= TF = OCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV =
_ =: _ = FT = 03r+(2)/R < .30 INCOM = 3
no V = 0+Zd>+3.5 FABCOM =
form = VF = Oep> EA ALOG
FV = OCF+C > FC CONTAM =
Form Quality Y = OX+% < .7 0
YF = +S > 3 CP
FQx FQf FY = 1 UP -e 3 or > 8 MOR =
+ = 1 + = rF = OH < 2 PER =
o = 11 o = 4 Fr = +R <17 PSV =
w= 2 w= 1 FD = 3_ Total Total = 3
-= - = F = 5
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 36-31 FC:CF+C = 3:1 Afr = 5/14=.36


zd = 4:0 W:M = 9:3 3r+(2)/R=8/14=.57
EB = 3:3.5 EA = 6..5 W:D = 9:3 Cont:R = 10:14
eb = 2:3 ep = 5.0 L = 5/9=.56 H+Hd:A+Ad = 4 :6
(FM=2 m= T= C'=l V=1 Y=l) F+% = 4/5=80% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
0:2
Blends:R = 5:14 X+% = 12/14=86% H+A:HD+Ad = 8:4
a:p = 4:1 A% = 8/14=57% XRT Achrom =
39/5=7.8"
Ma:Mp = 1 :1 XRT Chrom =
55/5=11"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Sequence o f Scores S u b je c t 9 Experim ental
Group I I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score

I 5" 1 Wo FO A 1.0
2 W+ M*+ H,Ls 4.0
3 W,So Fo Ad 1.0
4 Dd+ Fo Ls
II 3“ 5 W+ Mpo (2) H5Cg (P) 4.5
6 D,So Fo Capitol
Building
7 W,So Fw Ad 3.5
8 W,So Fw Ad 4.5
III 7" 9 D+ Mao (2) H P 3.0
10 D,So Fw Ad
IV 4" 11 Ddo FDo (H) 2.0
12 Wo FYo (2) Ls 2.0
13 W,So Fw Ad 2.0
V 6" 14 Wo Fo A P 1.0
15 Wo Fo A P 1.0 PSV
16 D,S+ YFo Na 4.0
VI 4“ 17 Ddo Fo Totem
Pole
18 Do Flo Ls
V II 5" 19 D+ Mpo (2) H P 3.0
20 DsSo Fo Bust 4.0
21 Do Fo A
22 D,So F§ Hh
V III 5" 23 Dd,So Mw H
24 Do FM o (2) A P
25 Do Fw An
26 Do Fo Ls
IX 1" 27 Do Fo (2) (A) PER
28 Ddo Fw Building
29 Ddo Fw Hd 2.5
X 4" 30 Do Fw (2) A P
31 Dd,So Fw H
32 Do Fw (2) A
33 Do FCo (2) Bt

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 9 E xp erim en tal
Group I I

R=33 Zf=16 ZSum= 43 P=6 (2)=9

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irs t) (Idiographic)

W = 10 H= 6 Bl = c a p ito l...= l
building
(H) =1 Bt= 1
D = 16 Hd = 1 Cg= 1 totem pole.=l
(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = 7 M = 5 A= 9 Ex= bust............=1
FM = 1 (A) = 1 Fi=
S = 11 m = Ad = 5 Fd= building...=1
C = (Ad) = Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= 1
CF = A1 = Ls= 5
FC = 1 An = 1 Na= 1 ..................... =
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay = Xy= ..................... =*
+ = 6 + = 1 FC' = S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 27 o=3 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = w= 1 TF = OCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV
- = - = FT = +3r+(2)/R < .30 INCOM =
no V = +Zd>+3.5 FABCOM =
form = VF = Oep> EA ALOG
FV = OCF+C> FC CONTAM =
Form Quality Y = +X+% <..70
YF = 1 +S> 3 CP
FQx FQf FY = 1 0P < 3 or> 8 MOR
+ = 1 + = rF = OH < 2 PER = 1
o = 21 o = 12 Fr = OR .£17 PSV = 1
w = 11 w = 10 FD = 1 £ Total Total = 2
- = - = F = 22
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 43-52..5 FC:CF+C = 1:0 Afr = 11/22=.50


zd = -9.5 W:M = 10:5 3r+(2)/R=9/33=.27
EB = 5:.5 EA = 5.5 W:D = 10:16 Cont:R = 15:33
eb = 1:3 i2p = 4.0 L = 22/11=2.0H+Hd:A+Ad = 7 :1 2
T=1 C''= V= Y=2) F+% = 12/22=55%(H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
L i.
sII
rH
B
II

1:1
Blends:R = 0:33 X+% = 22/33=67% H+A:HD+Ad = 1 5 :6
a:p = 3:3 A% = 13/33=39% XRT Achrom =
Ma:Mp = 2:3 24/5=4.8"
XRT Chrom =
20/5=4.0"

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Sequence o f Scores S u b je c t 9 Post
Group I I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score

I 1" 1 W,So Fo A 3.5


2 Do Fo H
3 W,Sv F- Ls 3.5
II 2" 4 w+ Mp.Fro (H) (P) 4.5
5 Do Fo A
6 Dd,So Fo Spire
7 W,So FTw Ad
III 1" 8 D+ Mo (2) H P 3.0
9 D,So Fw Hd
10 Do Fo A P
IV 2“ 11 Wo FDo (H) 2.0
12 Ddo FTo Bt 2.0
13 Wo Fw Ad 2.0
V 1" 14 Wo Fo A P 1.0
VI 2" 15 Do Fo Totem
Pole
V II 1" 16 D+ Mpo (2) H P 3.0
17 Do Fo A
18 D,So Fo Vase
19 D,So Fo Bust
V III 3" 20 D,So Fw Hd
21 Do FM o (2) A P
22 Ddo Fw Hd
23 Do Fw An
IX 4" 24 Do Fo (2) (A)
25 Do Fo Ad
26 D,So Fo Hd
27 D,So Fw Building
X 1" 28 Do FCw (2) A
29 Do Fo Bt
30 Do Fo (2) A
31 Ddo Fw H

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 9 Post
Group I I

R=31 Z f= 9 ZSum= 24.5 P=5 ( 2)=6

L o c a tio n F eatures Determi nants Contents Contents


(Blends F irs t) (Idiographic)

W = 7 M^.Fro H= 4 Bl= spire........ =1


(H)= 2 Bt= 2
D = 20 Hd = 4 Cg= vase.......... =1
(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = 4 M = A= 8 Ex= bust.. . . . . .***1
FM = (A) = 1 Fi=
S = 9 m = Ad = 3 Fd= totem pole.=l
C = (Ad) = Ge=
DU = Cn = Ab = Hh= building...=1
CF = A1 = Ls= 1
FC = 1 An = 1 Na=
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx=
C‘ F= Ay = Xy=
+ = 3 + = FC‘= S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 27 o = 3 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
V = 1 w= TF = OCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV
_ = _ = FT == 2 +3r+(2)/R < .3 0 INCOM =
no V = 0Zd> +3.5 FABCOM =
form = VF = £ep> EA ALOG
FV = 0CF+C> FC CONTAM =
Form Quality Y = +X+% < .7 0
YF = +S> 3 CP
FQx FQf FY = OP < 3 o r> 8 MOR
+ = + = rF = 0H < 2 PER
o = 21 o = 15 Fr = OR < 17 PSV
w = 9 w= 7 FD = 1 3 Total Total = 0
- = 1 - = 1 F = 23
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations


Ratios

ZSum-Zest = 24.5- 27.5 FC:CF+C = 1:0 Afr = 12/19=.63


Zd = -3.0 W:M = 7:3 3r+(2)/R= 9/31=.29
EB = 3:.5 EA = 3 W:D = 7:20 Cont:R = 14:31
eb = 1:2 ep = 3.i L = 23/8=2.9 H+Hd:A+Ad = 8:11
(FM=1 m= T=2 C;•= v= F+% = 15/23=65%(H)+(Hd): (A)+(Ad)=
2:1
Blends:R = 1:31 X+% = 21/31=68% H+A:HD+Ad = 15:7
a:p = 2:2 A% = 12/31=39% XRT Achrom =
7/5=1.4"
Ma:Mp = 1:2 XRT Chrom =
11/5=2.2"

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Sequence of Scores S u b je c t 10 Pre
Group I I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score

I 1" 1 Ddo Fw Hd
2 D,So Fo A
3 Wv Fw Space 5.5
Invader
II 7" 4 D,So Fo Rocket, Fi 4.5
5 Do F° a A
6 D,So FM w Ad
III 13" 7 Do FYw xy
8 W,So Fo Hd.Cg
IV 4" 9 Wo FDo (A) 2.0
10 Wo FYo Bt 2.0
V 1" 11 Wo FM“o A P 1.0
12 Wo FM o A 1.0 PSV
VI 6" 13 Wo Fo A 1.0
V II 4" 14 Do Fo (2) H P
V III 5" 15 Do Fo (2) A P
IX 14" Rejection
X 2" 16 Dd,So Fw Hd 6.0
17 Do Fo (2) A P

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
152
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 10 Pre
Group I I

R=17 Zf=8 ZSum= 23 P=4 (2)=3

Location Features Determi nants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 7 H= Bl= space........=1
invader
(H) = Bt= 1
D = 8 Hd = Cg= 1 rocket___=1
(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = 2 M = A= 7 Ex= —
FM = 3 (A) = 1 Fi= 1
S = 5 m = Ad = 1 Fd=
C = (Ad) = Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= .
CF = A1 = Ls=
FC = An = Na=
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay = Xy= 1 —
+ = + = FC' = S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 16 o = T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = 1 w= TF = OCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV
• = - = FT = +3r+(2)/R <.30 INCOM =
no V = 0Zd>+3.5 FABCOM =
form = VF = +ep> EA ALOG
FV = OCF+C > FC CONTAM =
Form Quality Y = +X+%< .70
YF = +S> 3 CP
FQx FQf FY = 2 TIP < 3 o r> 8 MOR
+ = + = rF = +H < 2 PER
o = 11 o = 7 Fr = OR < 1 7 PSV = 1
w= 6 w= 4 FD = 1 5_ Total Total = 1
- = - = F = 11
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 23-24 FC:CF+C = 0:0 Afr = 3/14=.21


zd = -1 W:M = 7:0 3r+(2)/R=3/17=.18
EB = 0 EA = 0 W:D = 7:8 Cont:R = 10:17
eb = 3 :2 ep = 5.0 L = H+Hd:A+Ad = 3 :8
11/6=1.83
(H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
-<
iii

( FM= m= F+% = 7/11=67%


ro

ii
ii

<ii
O

0:1
BlendsrR = 0:17 X+% = 22/33=67% H+A:HD+Ad = 8 :4
a:p = 3:0 A% = 13/33=39% XRT Achrom =
16/5=3.2"
Ma:Mp = 0:0 XRT Chrom =
41/5=8.2"

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
153
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 10 E xp erim en tal
Group I I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score

I 9" 1 W,So Fo Costume 1.0


II 7" 2 W,So FMpw Ad 4.5
3 D,S+ mo Rocket, Fi 4.5
4 Do Fo A
III 8" 5 Do Fo eg P
6 Do FYo Xy
7 Wo Fw Star War
Character
IV 2" 8 Wo FDo (A) 5.5
9 Wo Fo Bt 2.0
V 7" 10 Wo Fo A P 1.0
11 Wo F°n A P 1.0
VI 5" 12 Wo FMpo A 2.5
V II 15" 13 Do Mpo (2) (H) 3.0
14 Do C'Fo (2) Cl
V III 10" 15 Wo FCw (Hd) 4.5
16 Ddo Fw Hd
17 Do Fo (2) A P
IX 22" 18 Dd,So Fo (2) Hd
19 Do Fo A
X 4" 20 D,So Fw (Hd)Cg 6.0
21 D,So Fw H
22 Do Fo (2) A

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
154
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 10 Experim ental
Group I I

R=22 Z f= ll ZSum= 35.5 P=4 (2)=5

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 9 H= 1 Bl= costume....=1
(H)= 1 Bt= 1
D = 11 Hd = 2 Cg= 2 rocket........=1
(Hd) = 2Cl= 1
Dd = 2 M = 1 A= 7 Ex= Star W ar...=l
Character
FM = 2 (A) = 1 Fi= 1
S = 6 m = 1 Ad = 1 Fd= =
C = (Ad) = Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= ...................=
CF = A1 = Ls= 1
FC = 1 An = Na= ...................=
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx=
C'F= 1 Ay = Xy= 1 ~
+ = 1 + = FC' = S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 21 o = l T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = 1 w= TF = OCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV
FT = +3r+(2)/R < .3 0 INCOM =
no V = 0Zd>+3.5 FABCOM =
form = VF = +ep >■ EA ALOG
FV = TTCF+C > FC CONTAM =
Form Quality Y = OX+% < .70
YF = +S> 3 CP
FQx FQf FY = 1 OP < 3 o r > 8 MOR
+ = + = rF = +H < 2 PER = 1
o = 16 o = 10 Fr = 0 R < 17 PSV = 1
w= 6 w= 4 FD = 1 4 Total Total = 1
- = - = F = 14
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 35.5-34.5 FC:CF+C = 1:0 Afr = 8/14=.57


zd = -1.0 W:M = 9:1 3r+(2)/R= 5/22=.23
EB 1:.5 EA = 1.5 W:D = 9:11 Cont:R = 15:22
eb = 3:2 ep = 5.0 L 14/8=1.75
(FM=2 m=l T= C'=l V = Y=l) F+% = 10/14=71%
3:1
Blends:R = 0:22 x+% = 16/22=73% H+A:HD+Ad =10:5
a:p = 1:3 A% 9/22=41% XRT Achrom =
38/5=7.6"
Ma:Mp = 0:1 XRT Chrom =
51/5=10.2"

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
155

SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 11 Experim ental


Group I I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 6" 1 Do Mo H P
2 Ddo Fo A
3 Ddo Fo A
I I 38" 4 Do Fo Star Wars
Creature
III 8" 5 Dd+ Mao (2) An 3.0
IV 22" 6 D+ Mao (2) Hd P 3.5
V 11" 7 Wo Fo A P 1.0
VI 29" 8 Do FVo Fd
V II 16" 9 W,Sv VFw Deep Hole 4.0
V III 41" 10 W+ FM w (2) A,Ls P 4.5
IX 13" 11 Ddo Fw Hd 2.5
X 26" 12 Wo Fo A, Sea
Creatures

R eproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
156

STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 11 E xp erim en tal


Group I I

R=12 Zf=6 ZSum=‘ 18.5 P=4 (2)=3

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 4 H= 1 Bl = Star Wars..=l
Creature
(H)= Bt=
D = 4 Hd = 2 cg= Deep h o le ...= l
(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = 4 M = 3 A= 5 Ex= Sea creatures=l
FM = 1 (A) = Fi=
S = 1 m = Ad = Fd= 1 =
C = (Ad) = Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= ....................... =
CF = A1 = Ls= 1
FC = An = Na= =
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay = Xy= ~
S-Constellation (Adult)
COCO

FC‘ =
+
+ o
n II

ii

T = 0FV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring


CO
o
II

V = 1 w= TF = OCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV
- = - = FT = +3r+(2)/R <. .30 INC0M = 1
no V = 0Zd>+3.5 FABC0M =
form = VF = 1 Oep> EA ALOG
FV = 1 OCF+C> FC CONTAM =
Form Quality Y = m+% < .70
YF = 0S> 3 CP
FQx FQf FY = OP ^ .3 o r> 8 MOR
+ = + = rF = +H <T2 PER
o=9 o = 5 Fr = + R < 17 PSV
w= 3 w= 1 FD = 3_ Total Total = 1
_ = —= F = 6
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 18.5-17.0 FC:CF+C = 0:0 Afr


Zd = 1.5 W:M 4:3 3r+(2)/R= 3/12=^25
EB = 3:0 EA = 3 W:D 4:4 Cont:R = 9:12
eb = 1:2 ep = 3 L = 6/6=1.00 H+Hd:A+Ad = 3 : 5
(FM=1 m= T= C* = V=2 Y=) F+% = 5/6=83% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
Blends:R = 0 :12 X+% = 9/12=75% H+A:HD+Ad = 6 . 2
a:p = 4:0 A% = 5/12=42% XRT Achrom =
84/5=16.8"
Ma:Mp = 3:0 XRT Chrom =
126/5=25.2"

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
157
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 11 Post
Group I I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 2" 1 Do Mo H P
2 Do Fo A
3 Do Hd
F2 4.5
II 18“ 4 Dd,S- M“ .FV- (H)
III 5" 5 D+ Mp+ (2) H,Fi 3.0
IV 11“ 6 Dd+ Mao (2) Hd
V 3" 7 Wo Fo A P 1.0
VI 7“ 8 Do Fo Fd
9 Do FYo Feathers
VII 38" 10 W,Sv Fo Ge 2.5
V III 7“ 11 W+ FMpo (2) A,Ls 4.5
IX 25" 12 Ddo Hd
13 Wo m .FCo Ex 5.5
X 16" 14 Do Fo (2) A
15 Dv Fo (2) Coral

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
158

STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 11 Post


Group I I

R=15 Z f= 6 ZSum= 21 P=2 (2 )= 5

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 4 M*.FV- H= 2 Bl = Feathers...=1
M .FCo Creature
(H)= 1 Bt=
D = 8 Hd = 3 cg= Coral................. =1
(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = 3 M = 3 Ex= 1 3

>
ii
FM = 1 (A) = Fi= 1
m = Ad = Fd= 1 =
<M
CO
II

C = (Ad) = Ge= 1
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= 3

CF = A1 = Ls= 1
FC = An = Na= 3

DQ M Quality C‘ = Art = Sx=


C'F= Ay = Xy= 1 3

+ = 3 + = 1 FC' = S-Constellation (Adult)


o = 9 o = 2 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = 2 w= TF = OCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV
- = 1 - = 1 FT = 03r+(2)/R < .3 0 INCOM =
no V = +Zd>+3.5 FABCOM =
form = VF = oep > EA ALOG
FV = TTCF+C > FC CONTAM =
Form Quality Y = 0X+% < .70
YF = 0S> 3 CP
FQx FQf* FY = 1 +P< 3 o r > 8 MOR
+ = 1 + = rF = UH<2 PER
o = 11 o=5 Fr = +R<.17 PSV
w= 2 w= 2 FD = 3 Total Total = 0
- = 1 - = F = 8
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 21-17 FC:CF+C = 1:0 Afr = 5/10=.50


zd = -4 .0 W:M = 4:4 3r+(2)/R= 5/15=.33
EB = 4: . 5 EA = 4.5 W:D = 4:8 Cont:R = 11:15
eb = 2:2 ep = 4 . 0 L 8/7=1.14 H+Hd:A+Ad = 5:4
(FM=1 m=l T= C'= V=1 Y=l) F+% = 5/7=71% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
1:0
Blends:R = 2 : 1 5 X+% = 12/15=80% H+A:HD+Ad = 7 : 3
a:p = 4:2 A% = 4/15=27% XRT Achrom =
61/5=12.2
Ma:Mp =3:1 XRT Chrom =
71/5=14.2

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
159
SEQUENCE 0F SCORES Subject
Group I I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP :

I 1" 1 Wo Fo A P 1.0
2 Ddo Fo Ad
3 Do Fo A
I I 12" 4 Wo Fo A 4.5
5 Do Fg (2) A P
III 5" 6 D+ ITo (2) H P 3.0
7 Do Fo eg
IV 22“ 8 W- F- A 2.0 INCOM
V 9" 9 Wo Fo A P 1.0
10 Ddo Fo Hd
VI 5" 11 Do Fo Sx
12 Do Fo Hh P
V II 18" 13 Do Fo H P
14 Do Fo A
15 Ddo F°_ Sx
V III 19" 16 Do FMpo A P
17 D- F- Hd
IX 11" 18 Do Fw Sx
X 1" 19 Do Fo (2) A P
20 Do Fo Sx
21 D- F- An

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
160
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 12 Experim ental
Group I I

R=21 Zf=6 ZSum= 11.5 P=8 (2)=3

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 4 H= 2 Bl= =
(H)= Bt=
D = 14 Hd = 2 Cg=l =
(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = 3 M = 1 A= 9 Ex= ....................... =
FM = 1 (A) = Fi=
S = m = Ad = 1 Fd= ....................... =
C = (Ad) = Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= 1 ....................... =
CF = A1 = Ls=
FC = An = 1 Na= ....................... =
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx= 4
C'F= Ay = Xy= ....................... =
+ = 1 + = FC' = S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 17 o = l T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
V = w= TF = OCol.Shd B1 ^ 0 DV
- = 3 FT = TT3r+(2)/R ^ .3 0 INCOM = 1
no V = +Zd >+3.5 FABCOM =
form = VF = + ep> EA ALOG
FV = OCF+C> FC CONTAM =
Form Quality Y = OX+% < .70
YF = 0S> 3 CP
FQx FQf FY = OP * 3 o r > 8 MOR
+ = + = rF = OH -tf.2 PER
o= 17 o= 15 Fr = TTR-C 17 PSV
w= 1 w= 1 FD = _1 Total Total = 1
- = 3 - = 3 F = 19
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 11.5-17.0 FC:CF+C =0:0 Afr = 6/15=.40


zd = -5.5 W:M = 4:1 3r+(2)/R= 3/21=.14
EB = 1:0 EA = 1.0 W:D = 4:14 Cont:R = 8:21
eb = 1:0 ep = 1.0 L 19/2=9.5 H+Hd:A+Ad = 4:10
(FM=1 m= T= C'= V== Y=) F+% = 15/19=79% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
Blends:R = 0:21 X+% = 17/21=81% H+A:HD+Ad = 11:3
a:p =0:2 A% 10/21=48% XRT Achrom =
32/5=6.4
Ma:Mp =0:1 XRT Chrom =
48/5=9.6"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
161
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 12 Post
Group I I

Card RT No'. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 16" 1 W,So FMpo A 3.5


2 Dd,So Fo Triangles
3 Do Fo (2) Bt
4 Do Fo A
I I 13" 5 Do Fo A
6 Ddo Fo Roof, cupola 4.5
7 Do FYo Ad
8 Do (2) Ad P
F§ P 3.0
I I I 11" 9 D+ Mo (2) H
10 Do FYo eg
11 Do Fo Hd INCOM
IV 28“ 12 W- F- A 2.0
13 Do FTw A
V 1" 14 Wo Fo A (P) 1.0
15 Do Fo (2) Fd
16 Do Fw A1
VI 8" 17 Do FYo Indian
Design
18 Do Fo Ad P
19 Do Sx 2.5
F8 Hd
20 Do Mo
V II 20" 21 Do (2) A
Fl °
22 Do Mo (2) H P
V III 21" 23 D+ FM .FYo (2) A P 3.0
24 Do F° a Geode PER
IX 17" 25 Do FM .FYo (2) (A),Fi
26 Do Fw Sx
27 Do FVo Hd
X 7" 28 Do Fo Wishbone
29 Do Fo (2) A P
30 D- F- Sx
31 D- F- An

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
162 9

STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 12 Post


Group I I

R=32 Zf=8 ZSum= 23.5 P=6 (2)=10

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 3 FM*FYo H= 2 Bl= Triangles...= !


FM .FYo (H)= Bt=l
D = 27 Hd = 3 Cg= Roof Cupola.=1
(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = 2 M = 3 A = 11 Ex= Indian Design=:
FM = 2 (A) = 1 Fi=l
S = m = Ad = 4 Fd=l Geode............=
C = (Ad) = Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= ....................................... =

CF = A1 = 1 Ls=
FC = An = Na= ....................................... =

DQ M Quality C* = Art = Sx= 4


C'F= Ay = Xy=
+ = 2 + = FC'= S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 26 o = 3 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = 4 w= TF = (TCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV
_ = - = FT = 1 T)3r+(2)/R < .3 0 INCOM = 1
no V = 0Zd>+3.5 FABCOM =
form = VF = +ep> EA ALOG
FV = 1 OCF+C > FC CONTAM =
Form Quality Y = OX+% < .7 0
YF = 0S> 3 CP
FQx FQf FY = 4 OP < 3 or> 8 MOR
+ = + = rF = OH < 2 PER = 1
o = 25 o = 14 Fr = FR < 17 PSV
w= 3 w= 2 FD = 1 Total Total = 2
- = 4 - = 3 F = 19
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 23.5-24.0 FC:CF+C = 0:0 Afr = 10/22=.45


zd = -.5 W:M = 3:3 3r+(2)/R= 10/32=.31
EB = 3:0 EA =3.0 W:D = 3:27 Cont:R = 14:32
eb = 4:8 ep =12.0 L = 19/13=1.46 H+Hd:A+Ad = 5:15
(FM=4 m=T=1 C'= V=1 Y=6) F+% = 14/19=74% (H)+(Hd): (A)+(Ad)=
0:1
Blends:R =2:32 X+% = 25/32=78% H+A:HD+Ad = 14:7
a:p = 5:2 A% = 16/32=50% XRT Achrom =
73/5=14.6"
Ma:Mp = 3:0 XRT Chrom =
69/5=13.8"

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
163
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 13 Pre
Group I I I

Card RT No. Location Determinants) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 3" 1 W,So Fo Ad 1.0


2 Wo FMpo A 1.0
II 14" 3 Do (2) (H)
F§ H
4 Wo Mo
III 3" 5 D+ M* CF.Y+ (2) H,Fi P 3.0
6 Ddo MQ H
IV 2" 7 Wo FMpo A 2.0
V 2" 8 Wo Fo A P 1.0
VI 15" 9 Do FVo Sx
V II 18" 10 D+ Mpg (2) Hd 3.0
V III 16" 11 W+ FM o (2) A P 2.5
IX 57" rejection
X 3" 12 Do Fo (2) A
13 D,So Fw Hd
14 Do Fw A

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
164
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 13 Pre
Group I I I

R=14 Zf=7 ZSum= 13.5 P=3 (2)=5

Location Features Determi nants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 6 Ma.FC.Y+ H= 3 Bl= ..................... =


(H)= 1 Bt=
Hd = 2 cg= =
ii
o

(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = 1 M = 3 A= 6 Ex=
FM = 3 (A) = Fi=l
S = 2 m = Ad = 1 Fd= =
C = (Ad) = Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh=
CF = A1 = Ls=
FC = An = Na= =
DQ M Quality C‘ = Art = Sx=l
C‘ F= Ay = xy= .....................=
+ = 3 + = 1 FC' = S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 11 o = 3 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = w= TF = OCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV
—= —= FT = ]J3r+(2)/R < .3 0 INCOM = 1
no V = +Zd>+3.5 FABCOM =
form = VF = Oep> EA ALOG
FV = 1 +CF+C > FC CONTAM =
Form Quality Y = OX+% < .7 0
YF = 0S> 3 CP
FQx FQf FY = OP < 3 or> 8 MOR
+ = 1 + = rF = OH < .2 PER
o = 11 o = 4 Fr = +R <17 PSV
w= 2 w= 2 FD = 3_ Total Total = 1
- = - = F = 6
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 13.5-20.5 FC-.CF+C = 0:1 Afr = 4/10=.40


zd = -6.5 W:M = 6:3 3r+(2)/R= 5/14=.36
EB = 4:1 EA = 5.0 W:D = 6 :7 Cont:R = 7 :1 4
eb = 3 :1 ep = 5.0 L = 6/8=.75 H+Hd:A+Ad = 5 :7
(FM=3 m= T=1 C'= V= Y=l) F+% =4/6=67% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
1:0
Blends:R = 1:14 X+% = 11/13=85% H+A:HD+Ad = 10:2
a:p = 4:2 A% = 7/13=54% XRT Achrom =
Ma:Mp =3:1 40/5=8"
XRT Chrom =
93/5=18.6"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
165
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 13 E xperim ental
Group I I I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score

I 21" 1 Wo Fo A 1.0
2 W,So FO Ad 1.0
II 10" 3 W+ M“o (2) (H) 4.5
III 15" 4 Do M*+ ' (2) H P 3.0
5 Ddo Mo H
IV 2" 6 Wo Fo A 2.0
7 Do FTo Bt
V 2" 8 Wo Fo A P 1.0
9 Wo Fo A P 1.0
VI 13" 10 Wo Fro Hd 2.5
V II 5" 11 Do Mpo (2) H
12 Do F°a (2) A
V III 6" 13 Wo FM .FC.Fro A 4.5
IX 34" rejection
X 3” 14 Do Fw A
15 D,So Fw Hd
16 Do Fo (2) A ' P

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
166
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 13 Experim ental
Group I I I

R=16 Zf=9 ZSum= 20.5 P=4 (2)=5

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 8 FMa.FC.Fro H= 3 Bl = =
(H)= 1 Bt=l
D = 7 Hd = 2 cg= =
(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = 1 M = 4 A= 8 Ex=
FM = (A) = Fi=
S = 2 m = Ad = 1 Fd= .......................=
C = (Ad) = Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= ..................... =
CF = A1 = Ls=
FC = An = Na= =
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay = Xy=
+ = 1 + = FC'= S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 15 o = 4 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = w= TF = OCol.Shd B1 y o DV
_ = —= FT = 1 03r+(2)/R -C .30 INCOM =
no V = +Zd>+3.5 FABCOM =
form = VF = Oep > EA ALOG
FV = ZJCF+C > FC CONTAM =
Form Quality Y = UX+% < .70
YF = 0S> 3 CP
FQx FQf FY = OP < 3 o r> 8 MOR
+ = 1 + = rF = OH < 2 PER
o = 13 o = 7 Fr = 1 +R 4. 17 PSV
w= 2 w= 2 FD = 2_ Total Total = 0
_ = - = F = 9
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 20.5-27.5 FC:CF+C = 1 :0 Afr = 4/12=.33


zd = -7 W:M = 8:4 3r+(2)/R= 11/16=.69
EB = 4 :.5 EA =4.5 W:D = 8:7 Cont:R = 6:16
eb = 1:1 ep= 2 .0 L 9/7=1.29 H+Hd:A+Ad = 5:9
(FM=1 m=T=1 C'= V= Y=) F+% = 7/9=78% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
1:0
Blends:R = 1:16 X+% = 14/16=88% H+A:HD+Ad = 1 2:3
a:p = 4 :1 A% 9/16=56% XRT Achrom =
43/5=8.6"
Ma:Mp = 3 :1 XRT Chrom =
68/5=13.6"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 14 Experim ental
Group I I I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 4“ 1 Do Fo (2) A
2 Ddo Fw (2) A
3 Do Fo, Bell
II 1“ 4 D+ FM .Co (2) A,colors P 4.5 INCOM
III 3" 5 D+ M+ (2) H P 3.0
6 Do A P

IX 7" 7 Dd- M- (2) (H) 3.5
V 3" 8 Wo FMp.FC‘ o A P 1.0
VI 1" 9 W- F- Fd 2.5
V II 1" 10 W+ Mao (2) H P 2.5
V III 1" 11 D+ FM .FCo (2) A P 3.0 INCOM
12 Do FCw (2) A,Ls
13 D+ FMao A,Ls
IX 13" 14 Do Mpo (2) H 4.5
15 Wv Fo Hh PER
X 2" 16 Do Fo Ad
17 Do Fo (2) (A),H
18 Do FCo (2) A
19 D- FC- Ge PER

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
168
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 14 Exp erim en tal
Group I I I

R=19 Zf=8 ZSum= 24.5 P=6 (2)=11

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irs t) (Idiographic)

W = 4 FM*Co H= 4 Bl = B ell..............= 1
fmP . fc * (H)= 1 Bt=
D = 13 FM .FCo Hd = Cg= Colors..........=
(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = 2 M = 4 A= 9 Ex= =
FM = 1 • (A) =1 Fi=
S = m = Ad = 1 Fd=l ....................... =
C = (Ad) = Ge=l
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh=l ....................... =
CF = A1 = Ls=2
FC = 3 An = Na=
DQ M Quality C‘ = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay = xy= =
+ = 5 + = 1 FC*= S-Constellation (Adult)
I— *

T = 0FV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring


ro
II
II
o
o

V = 1 W = TF = tfCol.Shd B1 > 0 PSV


- = 3 - = 1 FT = 03r+(2)/R < .3 0 DV
no V = 0Zd>+3.5 INCOM = 2
form = VF = Oep > EA FABC0M =
FV = FCF+C > FC C0NTAM =
Form Quality Y = 0X+% .70 PER = 2
YF = OS > 3 AL0G
FQx FQf FY = 0P<. 3 o r > 8
+ = 1 + = rF = OH < 2
o = 13 o = 6 Fr = OR < 17
w= 2 w= 1 FD = £ Total Total = 4
- = 3 - = 1 F = 8
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 24.5-24 FC:CF+C = 4:1 Afr = 9/10=.90


zd = .5 W:M = 4:4 3r+(2)/R= 11/19=.58
EB = 4:3.5 EA = 7.5 W:D = 4:13 Cont:R = 11:19
eb = 4:1 ep = 5.0 L 8/11=.73 H+Hd:A+Ad = 4 :1 0
(FM=4 m= T= C'=l V= Y=) F+% = 6/8=75% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
1:1
Blends:R = 3:19 X+% = 14/19=74% H+A:HD+Ad =15:2
a:p = 6:2 A% 11/19=58% XRT Achrom =
16/5=3.2"
Ma:Mp = 3 :1 XRT Chrom =
20/5=4.0"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
169
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 14 Post
Group I I I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 24“ 1 Wo Mp.FMpo (2) A,Bell,H 1.0


2 Ddo (A)
F8
II 23" 3 D+ Mw (2) Blobs 3.0 INCOM
III 4" 4 Do F8 (2) H
5 Do mpo (2) An
6 Do Fo A P
IV 15" 7 W- F- Xy,Ad 2.0
V 1" 8 Wo FMpo A P 1.0 M0R
VI 7" 9 Wo mpo Guitar 2.5 M0R
V II 9" 10 D+ Mo (2) H P 3.0
11 Do Fo Hour Glass
Figures
V III 2" 12 Wo FCo a (2) Emblem P 4.5
IX 3" 13 W+ FC.FM o (2) (A),Cl,Blobs 5.5
X 3" 14 Do FCo (2) A P
15 Do ECo (2) (A)
16 D+ FMpo (2) (A) 4.0
17 Ddo Fw (2) Ge
18 Do FCo (2) A

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
170
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 14 Post
Group I I I

R=18 Zf=9 ZSum= 26.5 P=5 ( 2)=12

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 6 M.PFMP0 H= 3 Bl = B e ll.............= 1
FC.FM o (H)= Bt=
D = 10 Hd = cg= Blobs...........= 2
(Hd) = Cl=l
Dd = 2 M = 2 A= 6 Ex= Guitar......... = 1
FM = 2 (A) =3 Fi=
S = m = 2 Ad = 1 Fd= Hour Glass..=1
Figures
C = (Ad) = Ge=l
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= Emblem..........=]
CF = A1 = Ls=
s
FC = 4 An = 1 Na=
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay = Xy=l
FC' = S-Constellation (Adult)
+
+

ii
ii

o = 13 o = 2 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring


v = w= 1 TF = OCol.Shd B1 > 0 PSV
_ = X _ = FT = 03r+(2)/R <*.30 DV
no V = 0Zd>+3.5 INCOM =:
form = VF = +ep> EA FABCOM
FV = OCF+C > FC CONTAM
Form Quality Y = OX+% ** .70 ALOG
YF = (JS> 3 mor =;
FQx FQf FY = OP ^ 3 o r > 8 Total =:
+ = + = rF = OH < 2
o = 15 o = 4 Fr = OR < 17
w= 2 w= 1 FD = 1^ Total
- = 1 - = 1 F = 6
no
form =
Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 26.5- 27.5 FC:CF+C = 5 :0 Afr = 7/11=.64


zd = - 1 W:M = 6:3 3r+(2)/R= 12/18=.6
EB = 3:2.5 EA = 5.5 W:D = 6 :1 0 Cont :R = 13:18
eb = 6:0 ep = 6.0 L = 6/12=.50 H+Hd:A+Ad = 3:7
(FM=4 m=2 T= C‘= V= Y=) F+% = 4/6=67% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
0:3
Blends:R = 2:18 X+% = 15/18=83% H+A:HD+Ad =12:1
a:p = 3:6 A% = 10/18=56% XRT Achrom =
56/5=11.2"
Ma:Mp = 2:1 XRT Chrom =
35/5=7.0"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
171
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 15 Experim ental
Group I I I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 3"1 Wo M9 (H) 1.0


2 Wo FM“w (2) A 1.0
II 5" 3 D+ FM o (2) A,Fd P 3.0 PER
4 Wo A 4.5
III 3" 5 D+ Mo (2) H 3.0
6 Do Fw (H) INCOM
IV 33 " 7 Wo FM w A 2.0
V 8" 8 Wo FC'o A P 1.0
9 Wo A 1.0

VI 23" 10 Dd+ m.YFo Rocket, Fi 2.5
Smoke
V II 9" 11 W+ Mpo (2) H 2.5
V III 11“ 12 W+ FM .Fro Ls,A P 4.5 PER
IX 22" 13 w+ FC.Frw Ls 5.5
X 10" 14 Wv m .CFw Ex,Fireworks 5.5

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
172
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 15 E xp erim en tal
Group I I I

R=14 Zf=13 ZSum= :37 P=3 (2)=4

Location Features Determi nants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 10 m ,YFo H= 2 Bl = Rocket........=1
FM . Fro (H)=2 Bt=
FC.Frw Hd = cg= Smoke..........=1
CO
Q
II

ma.CFw (Hd) = Cl=


Dd = 1 M = 3 A= 7 Ex=l Fireworks..=1
FM = 3 (A) = Fi=l
S = m = Ad = Fd=l ................... =
C = (Ad)= Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh=
CF = A1 = Ls=2
FC = An = Na= =
DQ M Quality C‘ = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay = Xy=
+ = 6 + = FC'= 1 S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 7 o = 3 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = 1 w= TF = UCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV
_ = —= FT = 03r+(2)/R <.30 INCOM =1
no V = +Zd>+3.5 FABCOM
form = VF = +ep> EA ALOG
FV = OCF+C > FC CONTAM
Form Quality Y = +X+%< .70 CP
YF = OS > 3 MOR
FQx FQf FY = OP < 3 o r > 8 PER =2
+ = + = rF = UH < 2 PSV
o= 8 o = l Fr = OR < 17 Total =3
w= 6 w= 2 FD = 4^ Total
- = - = F = 3
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSurn-Zest = 37-41 .5 FC:CF+C = 1:1 Afr 3/11=.27


zd = - 4.5 W:M = 10:3 3r+(2)/R= 10/14=.71
EB = 3:1.5 EA = 4.5 W:D = 10:3 Cont:R = 10:14
eb S 5:2 ep = 7 L 3/11=.27 H+Hd:A+Ad = 2:7
(FM=3 m=2 T:=0 C‘ =1 V=0 Y=l) F+% = 1/3=33% (H)+(Hd): (A)+(Ad)=
2:0
Blends:R == 4:14 X+% = 8/14=57% H+A:HD+Ad = 11:0
a:p = 7:2 A% 7/14=50% XRT Achrom =
76/5=15.2
Ma:Mp = 2 :1 XRT Chrom =
51/5=10.2"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
173
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 15 Post
Group I I I

Card RT No. Location Determinants) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 13" 1 W+ Mp.Fr+ H,Ls 4.0


II 30" 2 Ddo F- (2) A
III 22" 3 Do Mpo (2) H,Cg P
IV 16" 4 Ddo Mpo (2) H,Bt 4.0
V 20" 5 Wo FS A P 1.0
VI 7" 6 W+ M o.rF Fi ,Na
Smoke
V II 27" 7 W+ Mao (2) H P 2.5
V III 26" 8 W+ FM . Fro A P 4.5
IX 30" 9 Dd+ FC.FM w (2) A 2.5 INCOM
X 37" 10 Do FM .Frw A 4.0

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
174
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 15 Post
Group I I I

R=10 Zf=7 ZSum= 22.5 P=4 (2)=5

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends First (Idiographic)

w = 5 Mj+.Fr H= 4 Bl= Smoke..........=1


m o.rF (H)= Bt=l
D = 2 FM o.Fr Hd = Cg=l ..................... =
FC.FM w (Hd) = Cl=
Dd = 3 M = 3 A= 5 Ex=
FM = (A) = Fi=l
S = m = Ad = Fd= ..................... =
C = (Ad)= Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= ......... . . . . . . =
CF = A1 = Ls=l
FC = An = Na=l =

DQ M Quality C‘ = Art = Sx=


C‘ F= Ay = Xy= ....................... =
+ = 5 + = 1 FC' = S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 5 o = 3 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = w= TF = OCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV
- = - = FT = TT3r+(2)/R < .3 0 INCOM =:
no V = TjZd >+3.5 FA B C O M
form = VF = Oep > EA ALOG
FV = OCF+C > FC CONTAM
Form Quality Y = +X+% < .70 CP
YF = 0S> 3 MOR
FQx FQf FY = OP < 3 o r > 8 PER
+ = 1 + = rF = OH < 2 PSV
o = 5 0=1 Fr = +R <17 Total =
w= 3 w= FD = 2 Total
- = 1 - = 1 F = 2
no
form :

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 22.5-20.5 FC:CF+C = 1 :10 Afr = 3/7=.43


Zd = 2.5 W:M = 5:4 3r+(2)/R= 17/10=1.7
EB = 4 :.5 EA = 4.5 W:D = 5:2 Cont:R = 8:10
eb = 4:0 ep = 4.0 L = 2/8=.25 H+Hd:A+Ad = 4 :5
(FM=3 m=l T= C‘= V= Y=) F+% = 1/2=50% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
Blends:R = 5:10 X+% = 6/10=60% H+A:HD+Ad = 9 :0
a:p = 15:3 A% = 7/14=50% XRT Achrom =
83/5=16.6"
Ma:Mp = 1:3 XRT Chrom =
145/5=29"

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
1.75
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 16 Pre
Group I I I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 2" 1 Do Fo A
II 21" 2 Do (2) A
III 40" 3 Do Mo H
IV 24" 4 Do Fo A
5 Do Fo (2) Hd
V 7" 6 Wo A
F§ Ex
VI 27" 7 Wv mo
VII 19" Rejection
V III 9" 8 Do Fo (2) A
IX 19" 9 Do Fw (2) An,Hd
X 11" 10 Do Fo (2) A
11 Do Fw (2) A

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 16 Pre
Group I I I

R = ll Z f=3 ZSum= 9 P=5 ( 2)=6

L o c a tio n F ea tu re s Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 2 H= 1 Bl= ............................................... =

(H)= Bt=
D = 9 Hd =2 Cg= ............................................... =

(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = M = 1 A= 7 Ex=l

ii
«








FM = (A) = Fi=
S = m = 1 Ad = Fd= =

C = (Ad)= Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= ........................................... =

CF = A1 = Ls=
FC = An =1 Na=
DQ M Quality C’ = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay = Xy= .......................................... =

FC' = S-Constellation (Adult)


+
+

ii
ii

o = 10 o = 1 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring


V = 1 W= TF = TTCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV
FT = 03r+(2)/R < .3 0 INCOM
no V = 0Zd>+3.5 FABCOM
form = VF = Oep> EA . ALOG
FV = tfCF+C > FC. CONTAM
Form Quality Y = OX+% < .70 CP
YF = 0S> 3 MOR
FQx FQf FY = OP < 3 o r> 8 PER
+ = + = rF = +H < 2 PSV
o= 9 o = 7 Fr = +R <17 Total =i
w= 2 w = 2 FD = 2 Total
_ = - = F = 9
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 9-6 FC-.CF+C = 0:0 Afr = 4/7=.57


Zd = 3.0 W:M = 2:1 3r+(2)/R= 6/11=.55
EB 1:0 EA = 1.0 W:D = 2:9 Cont:R = 5:11
eb = 1:0 ep = 1.0 L = 9/2=4.5 H+Hd:A+Ad = 3 :7
(FM= m=l T= C‘ = V= Y=) F+% = 7/9=78% (H)+(Hd): (A)+(Ad)=
Blends:R = 0:11 X+% = 9/11=82% H+A:HD+Ad = 8 :2
a:p = 2:0 A% = 7/11=64% XRT Achrom =
79/5=15.8"
Ma:Mp 1:0 XRT Chrom =
100/5=20"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
1.77
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 16 Experim ental
Group I I I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 25" 1 Wo M .FC'0 (H) 1.0


2 Do Fo A
II 39 3 Do FC.FYo (2) A P
III 27" 4 Do Mo H
IV 20" 5 Do Mo (2) Hd 4.0
V 10" 6 Wo Fo A P 1.0
VI 27 7 Do FYo a Flag
8 Do YF.M o Ex 2.5
V II 36" 9 Do Fo (2) Ad
V III 15" 10 Do Fo (2) A P
IX 25" 11 Wo Fw (2) An,Hd 5.5
X 12" 12 Do Fo (2) A P
13 Do FYw (2) A

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
1 /8
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 16 E xperim ental
Group I I I

R=13 Z f= 5 ZSum= 14 P=4 (2 )= 7

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 3 M .FC'o H= 1 Bl= Flag............=1


FC.FYo (H)=l Bt=
D = 10 YF.m o Hd =2 Cg= ................... =
(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = M = 2 A= 6 Ex=l ................. =
FM = (A) = Fi=
S = m = Ad = 1 Fd= ................. =
C = (Ad)= Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= ................. =
CF = A1 = Ls=
FC = An =1 Na= ................. =
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx=
C‘ F= Ay = xy= ................. =
+ = + = FC' = S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 13 o = 3 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = w= TF = TCol.Shd B1 > 0 PSV
- = - = FT = 03r+(2)/R <.30 DV
no V = 0Zd>+3.5 INCOM
form = VF = +ep > EA FABCOM
FV = OCF+C > FC CONTAM
Form Quality Y = OX+% < .70 ALOG
YF = 0S> 3
FQx FQf FY = 2 OP < 3 o r > 8 Total = 0
+ = + = rF = +H < 2
o = 11 o = 5 Fr = +R < 1 7
w= 2 w= 1 FD = 4 Total
- = - = F = 6
no
form =

Ratios, IPercentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 14-13 .5 FC:CF+C = 1:0 Afr = 4/9=.44


Zd = .5 W:M = 3:3 3r+(2)/R= 7/13=.54
EB = 3 : .5 EA = 3.5 W:D = 3:10 Cont:R = 8:13
eb = 1 :5 ep = 5.0 L = 6/7=.86 H+Hd:A+Ad = 3 :7
(FM= m=l T= C‘=l V= Y=4) F+% = 5/6=83% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
1:0
Blends:R = 3:13 X+% = 11/13=85% H+A:HD+Ad = 8 :3
a:p = 4:0 A% = 7/13=54% XRT Achrom =
124/5=24.8"
Ma:Mp = 3:0 XRT Chrom =
118/5=23.6"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 17 Exp erim en tal
Group I I I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score

I 2" 1 Wo FM .FC'o A P 1.0


2 Do FC'o (2) (H)
II 25" 3 W+ Mo (2) (H) 4.5
4 Do Ftf (2) A
III 9" 5 D+ Mpo (2) (H) 3.0
IV 15" 6 Wo FDo H 2.0
V 7" 7 Wo Fo A P 1.0
8 Wo FYo H 1.0
VI 7" 9 Wo Ad P 2.5
FI °
V II 8" 10 D+ (2) H P 3.0
Mn°
11 D+ Mpo (2) (H) P 3.0
V III 9" 12 W+ FM .Fr.CF+ A,Ls P 4.5
IX 17" 13 W+ M .CF.Fro (H),Ls 5.5
X 14" 14 Dv CF.C'Fw (2) Germs
15 Do FCo (2) A P
16 Do FCo (2) FD
17 Do FCo (2) A

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 17 Experim ental
Group I I I

R=17 Z f= ll ZSum= 31 P=8 (2)=10

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 8 FM^.FC'o H= 4 Bl= ..................... =


FM .Fr.CF+ (H)=4 Bt=
D = 9 Mp.CF.Fro Hd = cg= i ................. =
CF.C'Fw (Hd) = Cl=
Dd = M = 4 A= 7 Ex= ................. =
FM = (A) = Fi=
S = m = Ad = 1 Fd=l =
C = (Ad)= Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh=
CF = 1 A1 = Ls=2
FC = 2 An = Na=l ................. =
DQ M Quality C* = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay = xy= ................. =
+ = 6 + = 0 FC’= 1 S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 10 o = 5 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = 1 w= TF = OCol.Shd B1 > o PER
FT = 1 TT3r+(2)/R < .30 PSV
V = I[Zd>+3.5 DV
VF = Oep > EA INCOM
FV = +CF+C> FC FABCOM
Form Quality Y = OX+% < .7 0 ALOG
YF = 0S> 3 CONTAM
FQx FQf FY = 1 OP < 3 o r> 8 Total = 0
+ = 1 + = rF = OH < 2
o = 15 o = 2 Fr = OR < 17
w= 1 w= 1 FD = 1 1 Total
F = 3
no
form =
Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 31.0-34.5 FC:CF+C = 2:3 Afr = 6/11=.54


Zd = 3.5 W:M = 7:5 3r+(2)/R= 16/17=.94
EB = 5:9 EA = 7 W:D = 7:10 Cont:R = 6:17
eb = 2:5 ep = 7 L 3/17=.18 H+Hd:A+Ad = 4 :7
(FM=2 m= T=1 C'=3 V= Y=l) F+% = 2/3=67% (H)+(Hd): (A)+(Ad)=
4:0
Blends:R = 4:17 X+% = 16/17=94% H+A:HD+Ad = 11:0
a:p = 4:3 A% 8/17=47% XRT Achrom =
39/5=7.8"
Ma:Mp = 2:3 XRT Chrom =
74/5=14.8"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
181
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 17 Post
Group I I I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 8" 1 Wo Fo A P 1.0
2 Do Ad
F8 H
3 Do Mro
II 10“ 4 W+ Mg (2) H 4.5
5 Do FM o A
III 23“ 6 Do n a A,Mask INCOM
7 W+ Mp.mp.M o (2) H,Ab,Cg P 5.5 FABCOM
IV 12“ 8 Wo Mp.FDo H 2.0
9 Wv Mpw candle wax 2.0
V 9“ 10 Wo F+ H 1.0
11 Wo Fo A P 1.0
VI 5" 12 Wo Hh P 2.5
V II 2“ 13 D+ &
Mo (2) H P 3.0
14 Do FQ (2) H P 3.0
15 Do Mpg (2) Punch & Judy
V III 3" 16 Do FM o A P
17 W+ CF.rFo Na 4.5
IX 6" 18 Do Mao (H)
19 W+ CF.rFw Na 5.5
20 D+ Mo _ H 2.5
X 2" 21 D- FC.Mpo (2) Germs PER
22 Do Fo (2) A P INCOM
23 Do FCo Bt
24 Do Fo (2) A

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
182
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 17 Post
Group I I I

R=24 Zf=13 ZSum= 38 P=8 (2)=8

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irs t) (Idiographic)

W = 10 Mp.mp.M H= 8 Bl= Mask............=1


Mp.FDo (H)=l Bt=l
D * 14 CF.rFo Hd = Cg=l Candle Wax =1
FC.Mpo (Hd) = Cl=
Dd = M = 5 A= 7 Ex= Punch & Judy=l
FM = 2 (A) = Fi=
S = m = 2 Ad = 1 Fd= Germs..........=1
C = (Ad)= Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = 1 Hh=l
CF = A1 = Ls=
FC = 1 An =1 Na=2 ............................ =
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay = xy=
+ = 6 + = FC' = S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 16 o = 9 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = 1 w= TF = OCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV
_ = i _ = FT = 03r+(2)/R < .3 0 INCOM =2
no V = FZd > +3.5 FABCOM =1
form = VF = Oep > EA ALOG
FV = 0CF+C> FC CONTAM
Form Quality Y = OX+% < .70 CP
YF = 0S> 3 MOR
FQx FQf FY = OP < 3 o r> 8 PER =1
+ = 1 + = 1 rF = OH < 2 PSV
o = 20 o = 7 Fr = OR < 17 Total =4
w= 3 w= 1 FD = F Total
- = - = F = 9
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 38-41 .5 FC:CF+C = 2 :2 Afr = 9/24=.38


Zd = -3.5 W:M = 10:9 3r+(2)/R= 14/24=.58
EB = 9:3 EA = 12 W:D = 10:14 Cont:R = 13:24
eb = 3:2 ep = 4 L = 9/15=.60 H+Hd:A+Ad = 8:8
(FM=2 m=3 T= C'= V= Y=) F+% = 7/9=78% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
1:0
Blends:R = 5:24 X+% = 21/24=88% H+A:HD+Ad = 1 6:1
a:p = 8:6 A% = 8/24=33% XRT Achrom =
36/5=7.2"
Ma:Mp = 5:3 XRT Chrom =
44/5=8.8"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 18 Pre
Group I I I

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score

I 2“ 1 Wo A P 1.0
FI °
2 Do MnW (2) H 6.0
3 W+ Mpo (2) H 6.0 PSV
4 Do Fo A
II 8" 5 Wv C.Fo Art
6 Dd+ Mo (2) Hd 5.5
7 Do Fo A
III 25'' 8 Do FC'o (2) H P 3.0
9 Do Maw A, Bowling 4.0
Balls
10 Do Fo (2) H P
IV 10*'11 Wo Fo A 2.0 MOR
12 W+ Fo Hd
13 Ddo Fw Sx
14 Dd,So Fwa eyes
V 2" 15 W+ FM w A 2.5
16 Wo Fo A P 1.0
17 Do Fo Tweezers
18 Ddv F° a a Ls
VI 2" 19 D+ FM .m w A 2.5
20 Dv mo Ex
21 Dv FVw Dissection
22 Ddo Fw A
23 Do FTo Indian
Symbol
V II 2" 24 W+ Ma+ (2) H (P) 2.5
25 D,So F° a Arrowhead
V III 11" 26 Do FM o (2) A P
27 Do Fo Bt
28 Dv Fo Ls
29 D- F- n Hd
IX 9" 30 Wv CF.mp.Cw Fi ,B1 »Ls 2.5
X 11" 31 Wv mo Mardi Gras 5.5
32 Do (2) A P

33 Do Mo (2) H 4.5
34 Do Fw Hd
35 Do Fo (2) A

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 18 Pre
Group I I I

R=35 Zf=14 ZSum= 48.5 P=6 (2)=10

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends First) (Idiographic)

W = 10 FMa.maw H= 6 Bl=l Bowling Balls=l


C.Fon (H)= Bt=l
D = 20 CF.mpw.C Hd =4 Cg= Eyes............... =1
(Hd) = Cl =
Dd = 5 M = 6 A = 12 Ex=l Tweezers........=1
FM = 2 (A) = Fi=l
S = 2 m = 2 Ad = Fd= D issection...=1
C = (Ad)= Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= Indian Symbol=1
CF = A1 = Ls=3
FC = An = Na= Arrowhead___=1
DQ M Quality C' = Art =1 Sx=l
C‘ F= Ay = xy= Mardi G ras...=l
+ = 6 + = 1 FC'= 1 S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 21 o = 3 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = 7 w= 2 TF = OCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV
_ = x _ = FT = 2 +3r+(2)/R < .3 0 INCOM
no V = 0Zd>+3.5 FABCOM
form = VF = +ep> EA ALOG
FV = 1 +CF+C > FC CONTAM
Form Quality Y = +X+% < .70 CP
YF = 0S> 3 MOR =1
FQx FOf FY = OP < 3 o r> 8 PER
+ = 1 + = rF = OH < 2 PSV =1
o = 23 o = 13 Fr = OR < 1 7 Total =2
w = 10 w = 4 FD = 4^ Total
- = 1 - = 1 F = 18
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 48.5 - 45.5 FC:CF+C = 0:3 Afr = 10/25=.40


Zd = 3.0 W:M = 10:6 3r+(2)/R= 10/35=.29
EB = 6:4 EA = 10 W:D = 10:20 Cont:R = 17:35
eb = 7:4 ep = 11 L = 18/17=1.06 H+Hd:A+Ad = 10:12
(FM=3 m=4 T=2 C '=l V=1 Y=) F+% = 13/18=72% (H)+(Hd): (A)+(Ad)=
18:4
Blends:R = 3:35 X+% = 24/35=69% H+A:HD+Ad = 18:4
a:p = 11:2 A* = 12/35=34% XRT Achrom =
18/5=3.6"
Ma:Mp = 5:1 XRT Chrom =
64/5=12.8"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
185
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 18 Experim ental
Group I I I

Card RT No. Location Determinants) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 13" 1 Wv C'w Finger 1.0


Paints
2 Wo Fo A P 1.0
II 18" 3 Wv C Finger 4.5
Paints
4 Dd+ Maw (2) A P 3.0
III 31" 5 Do Fo (2) H P 3.0
6 Do Fo (A)
7 Do Fw A
IV 21" 8 Wo Fw Big Foot 2.0
9 Wo Fo (A) 2.0
V 25" 10 Wo Fo A 1.0
11 Wo Fo A 1.0
VI 38" 12 Do Fo Indian Design
13 Do Fo Ad
V II 28" 14 Do Fo Ad
15 Do FMpo A
V III 34" 16 Do Fo A P
17 Dv CFW Fd
IX 53" 18 Do Fo (H)
19 Dv C Crayon/Coloring
20 Do Fo Stick
21 Do Fw Cl
X 40" 22 Do Fw Hd
23 Do FT° Ad
24 Do FM w (2) A P 4.0

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
186
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 18 Experim ental
Group I I I

R=24 Zf=10 ZSum= 18.5 P=5 (2)=3

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 8 H= 1 Bl= Finger Paints=2


(H)=l Bt=
D = 15 Hd =1 Cg= Big Foot........=1
(Hd) = Cl=l
Dd = 1 M = 1 A= 8 Ex= Indian Design=l
FM = 2 (A) =2 Fi=
S = m = Ad = 3 Fd=l Crayon/Color-=l
C = 2 (Ad)= Ge= ing
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= Stick............. =1
CF = 1 A1 = Ls=
FC = An = Na= =

DQ M Quality C' = 1 Art = Sx=


C‘ F= Ay = Xy=
+ = 1 + = . FC' = S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 19 o = T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = 4 w= 1 TF = OCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV
_ = 1 _ = FT = +3r+(2)/R < .30 INCOM
no V = +Zd>+3.5 FABCOM
form = VF = Oep > EA ALOG
FV = +CF+C > FC CONTAM
Form Quality Y = +X+% < .7 0 CP
YF = 0S> 3 MOR
FQx FQf FY = OP < 3 o r> 8 PER
+ = + = rF = +H < 2 PSV
o = 14 o = 12 Fr = OR < 1 7 Total =
w= 8 w= 4 FD = 1[ Total
- = - = F = 16
no
form = 2

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 18.5-31 FC:CF+C = 0:3 Afr = 9/15=.60


Zd -12.5 W:M = 8:1 3r+(2)/R= 3/24=.13
EB 1:4 EA = 5.0 W:D = 8:15 Cont:R = 13:24
eb = 2:2 ep = 4.0 L 16/8=2.0 H+Hd:A+Ad = 2 :11
(FM=2 m= T=:L C'=l V=: Y=) F+% = 12/16=75% (H)+(Hd): (A)+(Ad)=
1:2
Blends:R = 0:23 X+% = 14/22=64% H+A:HD+Ad = 1 2 :4
a:p = 2:1 A% 13/24=54% XRT Achrom =
125/5=25"
Ma:Mp = 1:0 XRT Chrom =
176/5=35.2"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
187
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 19 Pre
Group IV

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Contends) POP Z Score

I 1 Wo Fo A 1.0
2 Do fq (2) (H) 1.0
3 W+ Wo (2) (H) 4.5
II 4 Do A

III 5 Do M .FC'o H, Basket P 4.0
6 Do Fo A P
IV 7 Wo Fo Ad 2.0
V 8 Wo Fo A P 1.0
VI 9 Wo fR Ad P 2.5
V II 10 Do Fro (2) Porcelain 3.0
Figures
V III 11 W+ FM .FCo (2) A,Bt P 4.5 FABCOM
IX 12 D,So Fw Ad
X 13 Dv Fw Hd
14 Do Fo Bt
15 Dd+ Fo An
16 Do Fo (2) A P
17 Do Fo Hd

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
1.88
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 19 Pre
Group IV

R=17 Zf=9 ZSum= 23.5 P=6 (2)=5

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

w = 7 Ma FC'o H= Bl = Basket........... =2
FM .FCo (H)=2 Bt= 2
D = 9 Hd = Cg= P o rc e la in ....=1
(Hd) = Cl = Figures
Dd = 1 M = 2 A= 6 Ex=
FM = (A) = Fi=
S = 1 m = Ad = 3 Fd=
C = (Ad)= Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh=
CF = A1 = Ls=
FC = An = 1 Na= —
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay = Xy=
+ = 3 + = FC' = S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 13 o = T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = 1 w= 3 TF = (TCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV "
_ = - = FT = +3r+(2)/R -C.30 INCOM
no V = +Zd>+3.5 FABCOM
form = VF = 0 e p > EA ALOG
FV = 0CF+C> FC CONTAM
Form Quality Y = 0X+% < .70 CP
YF = 0S> 3 MOR
FQx FQf FY = OP < 3 o r> 8 PER
+ = + = rF = OH <2. PSV
o = 16 o = 11 Fr = OR < 17 Total =
w= 2 w= 2 FD = 2 Total
- = - = F = 13
no
form = 2

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 23.5-■27.5 FC:CF+C = 1:0 Afr = 7/11=.64


Zd -4 W:M = 7:2 3r+(2)/R= 5/17=.29
EB 3:.5 EA = 3.5 W:D = 7:9 Cont:R =7:18
eb 1:1 ep = 2.0 L 13/4=3.25 H+Hd:A+Ad = 0 :9
(FM=1 m= T=:1 C‘=]L V= Y=) F+% = 11/13=85% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
2:0
Blends:R = 2:17 X+% = 16/18=89% H+A:HD+Ad = 8 :3
a:p 2:2 A% 9/18=50% XRT Achrom =
Not done
Ma:Mp = 1:0 XRT Chrom =
Not done

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
1.89
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 19 Experim ental
Group IV

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 12" 1 Wo Mo (2) H 1.0


2 Ddo FYo (2) eyes
II 20" 3 D,So FC'o spaceship
4 Do Fw (2) (H)
III 10" 5 Do Fw (2) A
6 Do Fo (2) An
7 Do FCo A P
IV 5" 8 W+ Mpo (H),Bean­ 4.0
stalk
V 4" 9 Wo Fo A P 1.0 MOR
VI 60" 10 Wo f2 A 2.5
V II 30" 11 W+ Mg (2) H P 2.5
V III 20" 12 w+ FM . FCo A,Bt,Ls P 4.5 FABC0M
IX 18" 13 Do Mpo (2) (H),hole,
smoke
14 Do Fo (2) Ad
X 13" 15 Dd,So Fw Hd
16 Do FCo Bt

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
190
«

STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 19 Exp erim en tal


Group IV

R=16 Zf =6 ZSum= 15.5 P=4 (2 )=8

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 6 FMa.FCo H= 2 Bl = Eyes............... =1
(H)=3 Bt= 1
D = 8 Hd = cg= Spaceship....=1
(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = 2 M = 4 A= 5 Ex= B eanstalk....=1
FM = (A) = Fi=
S = 2 m = Ad = 1 Fd= Hole............... =1
C = (Ad)= Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= Smoke............. =
CF = A1 = Ls=
FC = 2 An = 1 Na=
DQ M Quality C‘ = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay = Xy=
+ = 3 + = FC'= 1 S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 13 o = 4 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
V = w= TF = OCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV
—= —= FT = 03r+(2)/R < .3 0 INCOM
no V = 0Zd>+3.5 FABCOM =1
form = VF = Oep> EA ALOG
FV = OCF+C > FC CONTAM
Form Quality Y = OX+% < .7 0 CP
Yt- = 0S> 3 MOR =1
FQx FQf FY = 1 OP < 3 o r > 8 PER =1
+ = + = rF = OH < 2 PSV
o = 13 o = 4 Fr = +R < 1 7 Total =3
w= 3 w= 3 FD = 1_ Total
- = - = F = 7
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 15.5-17 FC:CF+C == 2:0 Afr = 5/11=.45


Zd = -1.5 W:M 6:4 3r+(2)/R= 8/16=.50
EB = 4:1 EA = 5 W:D 6:8 Cont:R = 11:16
eb = 1:2 ep = 3 L 7/9=.78 H+Hd:A+Ad = 2 :6
(FM=1 m= T= C‘=l V= Y=l) F+% 4/7=57% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
3:0
Blends:R = 1:16 X+% 13/16=81% H+A:HD+Ad =10:1
a:p = 3:2 A% 6/16=38% XRT Achrom =
111/5=22.2"
Ma:Mp = 2:2 XRT Chrom =
81/5=16.2"

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
191
f

SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 20 Pre


Group IV

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 20 " 1 Wo Fo A P 1.0
II 15" 2 Wo FCo (2 ) A,B1 (P) 4.5
n r n
III 30" 3 Do M*o (2) H P 3.0 rtK
4 Do M .Fr+ H P 3.0 M0R
IV 15" 5 Wo FMpo A 2 .0
6 Wo Mo (A) P 2 .0
V 5" 7 Wo FMpo A P 1 .0
VI 25" 8 Do Fo Ad P 2.5
9 Wo Ad
V II 10 " 10 W+ J$o (2) H,collar P 2.5
11 Do Foa
Necklace
V III 3" 12 Do FM .FC. FTo A P 4.5
13 Do Fo_ Hh
IX 10 " 14 Dd+ FMp.CF.FYo(2) A.Bt.H 2.5
X 20 " 15 W+ FM o (2) A 5.5 FABC0M

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
192
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 20 Pre
Group IV

R=15 Zf=12 ZSum= 34 P=8 (2)=5

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

w = 8 M ,Fr+ H=4 Bl= Collar .............................=1


FM°.FC.FTo (H)= Bt= 1
D = 6 FMp.CF.FYo Hd = Cg= Necklace....................=1
(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = 1 M = 3 A= 7 Ex=
FM = 3 (A) =1 Fi=
S = m = Ad = 2 Fd=
C = (Ad)= Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh=
CF = A1 = Ls=
FC = 1 An = Na= S

DQ M Quality C* = Art = Sx=


C'F= Ay = xy=
+ = 12 + = 1 FC' = S-Constellation (Adult)
o= 3 o = 3 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = - w =
TF = OCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV
_ = — = FT = Tl3r+(2)/R < .3 0 INC0M
no V = +Zd>+3.5 FABC0M =1
form = VF = +ep> EA ALOG
FV = OCF+C > FC CONTAM
Form Quality Y = 0X+% < . 7 0 CP
YF = OS > 3 MOR =1
FQx FQf FY = OP < 3 o r > 8 PER =1
+ = 1 + = rF = OH < 2 PSV
o = :L4 o = 5 Fr = + R < 17 Total =3
w= w= FD = 3_ Total
- = - = F = 5
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 34-38 FC:CF+C = 2:1 Afr = 4/11=.36


Zd -4 W:M 8:4 3r+(2)/R= 8/15=.53
EB 4:2 EA = 6.0 W:D 8:6 Cont:R = 9:15
eb = 5:2 ep = 7.0 L 5/11=.45 H+Hd:A+Ad = 4 :9
(H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
H-1

(FM=5 m= T= V= Y=l) F+% 5/5=100%


II
O

0:1
Blends:R = 3:15 X+% 15/15=100% H+A:HD+Ad =12:2
a:p = 5:4 AX 10/15=67% XRT Achrom =
75/5=15.0"
Ma:Mp = 3 :1 XRT Chrom =
78/5=15.6"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 20 E xp erim en tal
Group IV

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 34" 1 Uo Foa A
2 Dd,So FM o A
II 5" 3 Do CFo A 3.0 M0R
4 Dd- F- Mask
III 5" 5 Dv FQ (2) Earrings PER
6 D+ Mg n ( 2) H P 4.0
IV 5" 7 W+ FM*.FT.Mpo (A),H 4.0
V 12 " 8 Uo FMpo A P 1.0
VI 10 " 9 W- FMP A P
10 Wv mf.FC'o A 2.5
V II 3" 11 D+ Mo H P 3.0
12 Dd+ FVo Ls 1.0
V III 8" 13 Do FCo (2) A INC0M
14 Do FCo (2) Hh PER
IX 50" 15 D+ FY.FM“o A,Bt 2.5
X 10 " 16 W+ Cn.FMpw Colors

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
194
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 20 Exp erim en tal
Group IV

R=16 Zf =8 ZSum= 21 P=4 (2)=4

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 6 FM ,FT.Mpo H= 3 Bl= Mask.............= 1


M .FC'o (H)= Bt= 1
D = 7 Cn.FM pw Hd = Cg= Earrings........=1
(Hd) = Cl=

00
M = 2 Ex= Colors............=

ii
Dd = 3

>
FM = 3 (A) =1 Fi=
S = 1 m = Ad = Fd= .......................=
C = (Ad)= Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= 1 .....................=
CF = 1 A1 = Ls= 1
FC = 2 An = Na= .....................=
DQ M Quality C‘ = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay = Xy= .....................=
+ = 6 + = FC' = S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 6 o = 3 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = 2 w= TF = tfCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV =1
_ = 2 - = FT = +3r+(2)/R < .3 0 INCOM
no V = 0Zd>+3.5 FABCOM
form = VF = +ep> EA ALOG
FV = 1 OCF+C> FC CONTAM
Form Quality Y = OX+% *<.70 CP
YF = 0S> 3 MOR =1
FQx FQf FY = 0P < 3 o r > 8 PER =2
+ = 13 + = rF = OH < 2 PSV
t—»

ro

Fr = +R <17 Total =4
II
II
o

w= 2 w= FD = 3^ Total
- = - = 1 F = 3
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest =21-24 FC:CF+C = 2:2 Afr = 4/12=.33


Zd =-3 W:M = 6:3 3r+(2)/R= 4/16=.25
EB =3:3 EA = 6 W:D = 6:7 Cont:R = 9:16
eb =7:4 ep = 11 L = 3/13=.23 H+Hd:A+Ad = 3 :8
(FM=6 m=l T=1 C'=l V=1 Y=l) F+% = 2/3=67% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
0:1
Blends:R =4:16 X+% = 13/16=81% H+A:HD+Ad = 1 2 :0
a:p =6:4 A% = 9/16=56% XRT Achrom =
64/5=12.8"
Ma:Mp = 2:1 XRT Chrom =
78/5=15.6"

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
195
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 21 Exp erim en tal
Group IV

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 15" 1 W,So (2) (H) 1 .0


Mn°
II 21 “ 2 W+ Mp.CFo (2) A,B1 (P) 4.5
III 45" 3 Ddo Mp CFw ( 2 ) (H)B1 P 4.0 PSV,AL0G
IV 15" 4 Uo M^o (H) 2 .0
V 10 " 5 Uo Ho (H) 1 .0
VI 5" 6 U+ FM?o A,Ls 2.5
V II 9" 7 U+ FMV A,Ls 2.5
V III 10 " 8 U+ FC.tir .CF+ (2) A,B1,Fi 4.5 M0R
IX 40" 9 Do m.CFo Ex,Fi,Ls 2.5
X 16" 10 Do Fo (2) A
11 Do FCo (2 ) Bt

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
196
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 21 E xp erim en tal
Group IV

R = ll Z f= 9 ZSum= 24.5 P=1 ( 2)=6

L o c a tio n F eatu res Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 7 Mp. CFo H= Bl= 3 ..........................=


Mp.CFw (H)=4 Bt= 1
D = 3 FC.mYp.CF+ Hd = Cg=
M .CFo (Hd) = Cl=
Dd = 1 M = 3 A= 5 Ex= 1
FM = 2 (A) = Fi= 2
S = 1 m = Ad = Fd=
C = (Ad)= Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh=
CF = A1 = Ls= 3
FC = 1 An = Na= ..................... =
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay = xy= ..................... =
+ = 4 + = FC‘ = S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 7 o = 3 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = w= 1 TF = OCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV
_ = —= FT = 03r+(2)/R <.30 INCOM
no V = 0Zd>+3.5 FABCOM
form = VF = +ep> EA ALOG =1
FV = +CF+C > FC CONTAM
Form Quality Y = OX+% < .70 CP
YF = 0S > 3 MOR =1
FQx FQf FY = + P < 3 or > 8 PER
+ = 1 + = rF = 0 H <2 PSV =1
o = 8 o= 1 Fr = 0 R <17 Total =3
w= 2 w= FD = 3 Total
- = - = F = 1
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 24.5--27.5 FC-.CF+C = 1 :4 Afr = 4/7=.57


Zd = -3 W:M = 7:4 3r+(2)/R= 6/11=.55
EB = 4:5 EA = 6 W:D = 7:3 ContrR = 7 :1 1
eb = 5:0 ep = 11 L = 1/10=.10 H+Hd:A+Ad = 0:5
(FM=2 m=3 T= C'= V= Y=) F+% = 1/1=100% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
4:0
Blends:R = 4:11 X+% = 9/11=82% H+A:HD+Ad = 9 :0
a:p = 6:3 A% = 5/11=45% XRT Achrom =
54/5=10.8"
Ma:Mp = 3:1 XRT Chrom =
132/5=26.4"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 21 Post
Group IV

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 10 " 1 W,Sv CF'w Ab, Painting 1 .0


2 Wo Fw A (P) 3.0
II 5" 3 Do Fw (2) A 3.0
III 15" 4 Wo Fo (2) A 3.0
IV 2" 5 Wo FTo (A) P 2.0
V 2" 6 Wo Fo A 1 .0
VI 5" 7 Do Fo A
8 Ddo CF’w oriental
screen
V II 5" 9 Do Fro (A)
V III 20 " 10 Wo Fro A,Ls 4.5
IX 10 " 11 Wv CFw Painting 5.5
X 1 " 12 Wo CFo Aquarium 5.5

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
198
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 21 Post
Group IV

R=12 Zf =8 ZSum= 25.5 P=1 (2)=2

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 8 H= Bl= Painting___=2
(H)= Bt=
D = 3 Hd = Cg= O riental....= 1
(Hd) = Cl= Screen
Dd = 1 M = A= 6 Ex= Aquarium....=l
FM = (A) =2 Fi=
S = 1 m = Ad = Fd= =
C = (Ad)= Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = 1 Hh=
CF = 2 A1 = Ls= 1
FC = An = Na= ..................... =
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay = Xy=
+ = + = FC' = S-Constellation (Adult)
0FV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
n

T =
H-*

o =
o

v = 2 w= TF = TlCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV
- = - = FT = 1 03r+(2)/R < .3 0 INC0M
no V = 0Zd>+3.5 FABCOM
form = VF = 0ep> EA ALOG
FV = +CF+C > FC CONTAM
Form Quality Y = +X+% < .70 CP
YF = 0S> 3 MOR
FQx FQf FY = +P < 3 o r > 8 PER
+ = + = rF = +H< 2 PSV
o = 7 o = 3 Fr = 2 + R < 17 Total =
w= 5 w= 2 FD = j4 Total
- = - = F = 5
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 25.5--24 FC:CF+C =-- 0:2 Afr = 3/8=.38


Zd = 1.5 W:M 8:0 3r+(2)/R= 8/12=.67
EB = 0:3 EA = 3 W:D 8:3 Cont:R =7:12
eb = 0:3 ep = 3 L 5/7=.71 H+Hd:A+Ad = 0 :6
(FM= m= T==1 C'=2 V= Y=) F+% 3/5=60% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
0:2
Blends:R = 0:12 X+% 7/12=58% H+A:HD+Ad = 8 :0
a:p - 0:0 A% 8/12=67% XRT Achrom =
24/5=4.8"
Ma:Mp = 0:0 XRT Chrom =
51/5=10.2"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
199
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 22 Pre
Group IV

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 1" 1 Wo F° n A P 1 .0
2 W+ FY.Mpo (2 ) (H), 3.0
Cauldron
3 W,So Mask 1.0
4 Do Mo H P
5 W,So F° n Ad P
II 3" 6 Do FC.FMpo (2) A
7 D- F- (2) (H)
8 Do FCo A
9 D,So Fo Spaceship 3.0
10 Ddo (2) Hd
D+ F§ .FC.FYo
M 3.0
III 8" 11 (2) H.Pot
12 Do FMpo A P
13 Do Fw Ad
IV 5" 14 Wo FDo H 2.0
15 Wo FYo Bt 2.0
16 Ddo Fw A 2 .0
17 Wo FVo A 2.0
18 Wo Fo a A 2 .0
V 3" 19 Wo FY.FM o A P 1.0
20 Dd+ FM o (2) A,Ls 2.5
21 Ddo Fo (2) Hd
VI 8" 22 W+ Fro Ls 2.5
23 Do Fo Hh P
24 Do Fo Sx
25 Do Fo Headress/
Totem Pole
26 Do mao Rocketship,
Ex
V II 4" 27 D+ FY.Mpo (2) H 3.0
28. W+ Mo (2) H 3.0
29 Wv rFw Ls 2.5
V III 7" 30 D+ FMa.Fro A P 3.0
31 Ddo mao Rocket 3.0
32 Dd+ FCw Ls 3.0
IX 5“ 33 Dd+ CF.M o H,Fi
34 Dd,So FMpo A
35 D+ FM o (2) A 2.5
X 5" 36 Do F° a (2 ) A P
37 Do FMao (2) A
38 Do FMa.FCo (2) A
39 D+ FM w (2) A 4.0

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
200
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 22 Pre
Group IV

R=39 Zf=20 ZSum= 48.5 P=8 (2)=14

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irs t) (Idiographic)

w = 12 FY.Mpo FY,Mpo H= 5 Bl = Cauldron....=l


FM Fro (H)=2 Bt=l
F£ • FMpo
D = 19 M .FC.FYo CF.M o Hd =2 Cg= Mask............. =1
FY• FM o FM.FCo (Hd) = Cl =
Dd = 8 M = 2 A = 16 Ex=l Spaceship...=1
FM = 6 (A) = Fi=l
S = 4 m = 3 Ad = 2 Fd= Headress/...=1
C = (Ad)= Ge= Totem Pole..
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= 1 Rocketship..=l
CF = A1 = Ls= 4
FC = 2 An = Na= Rocket..........=1
DQ M Quality C‘ = Art = Sx= 1
C'F= Ay = xy= Pot............... =1
+ = 11 + = FC'= S- Constellation (Adult)
o = 26 o = 6 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = 1 w = TF = +Col.Shd B1 > 0 DV
- = 1 — = FT = TT3r+(2)/R < .3 0 INCOM
no V = +Zd >jK3.5 FABCOM
form = VF = +ep> EA ALOG
FV = 1 0CF+C> FC CONTAM
Form Quality Y = OX+% < .70 CP
YF = +S > 3 MOR
FQx FQf FY = 1 OP < 3 or> 8 PER
+ = + = rF = 1 OH 4C 2 PSV
o = 32 o = 10 Fr = 1 TJR < 1 7 Total
w= 6 w= 2 FD = 1 5 Total
- = 1 - = F = 13
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 48.5-66.5 ' FC:CF+C = 5:1 Afr = 10/29=.34


Zd = -18 W:M = 12:6 3r+(2)/R= 23/39=.59
EB = 6:3.5 EA = 9.5 W:D = 12:19 Cont:R = 18:39
eb = 13:6 ep = 19.0 L = 13/26=.50 H+Hd:A+Ad = 7:18
(FM=10 m=3 T= C'= V=1 Y=) F+% = 10/13=77% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
2:0
Blends:R = 8:30 X+% = 32/39=82% H+A:HD+Ad = 23:4
a:p = 1 3 :5 AS = 18/39=.46 XRT Achrom =
21/5=4.2"
Ma:Mp = 4:2 XRT Chrom =
28/5=5.6"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
201
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 22 E xp erim en tal
Group IV

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 19" 1 Wo Fo Mask 1.0


2 D+ ITo (2) H 6.0
3 Dv F.YFw Solid
II 6" 4 Wo Fo (2) A 4.5
5 D,So Fo Space
Capsule
III 16" 6 Do A
7 D+ MPo (2) H P 3.0
IV 9" Rejection
V 22 " 8 Wo Fo A P 1.0
9 Do Fo (2) A
CM
00

VI 10 Wo Hh P 2.5

11 Do m o Rocket,Smoke
V II 42" 12 W+ (2) H 2.5
F8
V III 30" 13 Do m .FCw Rocket 3.0
14 Do F§ (2) A P 3.0
IX 16" 15 D+ mf.CFw Rocket,Fi
16 Wv mw Ex 5.5
X 47" 17 Do FCo (2 ) A P
18 Do FCo (2) A
19 Do CFo (A)

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
202
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 22 Experim ental
Group IV

R=19 Zf=10 ZSum= 32 P=5 ( 2)=8

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 6 F.YFw H= 3 Bl = Mask............. =1
m . FCw (H}= Bt=
D = 13 m CFw Hd = Cg= Solid............=1
(Hd) = Cl =
Dd = M = 2 A= 7 Ex=l Space capsule=l
FM = (A) =1 Fi=l
S = 1 m = 2 Ad = Fd= Rocket..........=3
C = (Ad)= Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh=l Smoke............=1
CF = 1 A1 = Ls=
FC = 2 An = Na=
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay = xy=
+ = 4 + = FC' = S-Constellation (Adult)
CO
f—*

ro

0FV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring


O

T =
O

II
II

v = 2 w= TF = OCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV
—= - = FT = 03r+(2)/R < .30 INC0M =:
no V = 0Zd>+3.5 FABC0M
form = VF = 0ep> EA AL0G
FV = UCF-rC > FC C0NTAM
Form Quality Y = UX+% < .7 0 CP
YF = 0S> 3 M0R
FQx FQf FY = 1 OP < 3 or> 8 PER
+ = + = rF = 1 OH < 2 PSV
o = 14 o = 8 Fr = 1 0 R < 17 Total
w= 5 w= 1 FD = 1 Total
_ = _ = F = 9
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 32-31 FC:CF+C = 3 :2 Afr = 7/19=.37


Zd = 1.0 W:M = 6 :2 3r+(2)/R= 8/19=.42
EB = 2:3.5 EA = 5.5 W:D = 6:13 Cont:R = 11:19
eb = 4:1 ep = 5.0 L = 9/10=.90 H+Hd:A+Ad = 3 :7
(FM= m=4 T= C'= V=Y=l) F+% = 8/9=89% (H)+(Hd): (A)+(Ad)=
0:1
Blends:R = 3:19 X+% = 14/19=74% H+A:HD+Ad = 1 1 :0
a:p = 4:2 A% = 8/19=42% XRT Achrom =
120/5=24"
Ma:Mp = 0 :2 XRT Chrom =
115/5=23"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
203
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 23 Experim ental
Group IV

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score

I 7" 1 Wo Fo A 1.0
2 Wo Fw Airplane
II 10 " 3 D,S+ ma+ Smoke, F i,
a Spaceship
4 W+ FM + A,Stool, Balls 4.5
III 27 n 5 D+ Mo (2) H,drums P 3.0
6 Do Fw A
7 Do FCo A P
IV 21 " 8 Wo FMpo A P 1.0
9 Wo Fo A P 1 .0 PER
10 Wo Fw A 1.0
VI 11 " 11 Ddo Fo Musical 2.5
Instrument
12 Dd+ Fo Sword in Stone 2.5
13 Do Fo (2) Masks 2.5
14 Ddo A 2.5

V II 11 15 D+ M .Fro H P 3.0
16 D,So Arrowhead ALOG
fr
17 Wt M+ (2 ) H 2.5
V III 7" 18 Do FMa.FC. Fro A,Ls P 3.0
19 Do FCw Bt
20 Do Fo tr ilo b ite
21 Wo Fw Hd 4.5
IX 19" 22 Wo Mao Na, Volcano 5.5
23 D+ mo (H),(A) 2.5
X 10 " 24 Wo FM .FMH.FC.M+(2) A,underwater P 5.5 FABCOM
M +(2) scene
25 Wo FCw Bt 5.5

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
204
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 23 E xperim ental
Group IV

R=25 Zf=18 ZSum= 53.5 P=7 (2)=4

Location Features Determi nants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

w = 11 Ma.Fro H= 3 Bl = A irp la n e ....= l


FM“. ;^firPc.Ma+ Bt=2 Smoke........... =1
D = 11 FM .1 cg= Spaceship...=1
(Hd) = Cl= Stool........... =1
Dd = 3 M = 3 A = 10 Ex= Drums............=1
FM = 2 (A) = 1 Fi=l Musical Ins.=l
S = 2 m = 2 Ad = Fd= Sword in . . . .
C = (Ad)= Ge= S to n e ....=1
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= Masks............=1
CF = A1 = Ls= 1 Arrowhead...=1
FC = 3 An = Na= 1 T rilo b ite ...=1
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx= Underwater..
C‘ F= Ay = xy= Scene___=1
+ = 7 + = 1 FC' = S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 18 0 = 4 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = w= TF = OCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV
- = FT = 03r+(2)/R < .30 INCOM
no V = +Zd >+3.5 FABCOM
form = VF = Oep> EA ALOG
FV = OCF+C> FC CONTAM
Form Quality Y = UX+% < .70 CP
YF = 0S> 3 MOR
FQx FQf FY = 1 OP < 3 or > 8 PER
+ = + = rF = 1 OH < 2 PSV
o = 4 o = 8 Fr = 1 OR < 17 Total
w = 15 w = 4 FD = 1 1 Total
- = 6 - = F = 12
no
form =
Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 53.5-59.5 FC:CF+C = 5:0 Afr = 8/17=.47


Zd = - 6 .0 W:M = 11:4 3r+(2)/R= 10/25=.40
EB 5:2.5 EA = 7.5 W:D = 11:11 Cont:R = 22:25
eb = 7:0 ep = 7.0 L = 12/13=.92 H+Hd:A+Ad = 4 :11
(FM=5 m=2 T== C'= V= Y=) F+% = 8/12=67% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
1:0
Blends:R = 3:25 X+% = 19/25=76% H+A:HD+Ad = 1 4 :2
a:p = 10:2 A% = 11/25=44% XRT Achrom =
55/5=11".
Ma:Mp s 4:0 XRT Chrom =
73/5=14"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
205
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 23 Post
Group IV

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 17" 1 W,So Fw Ad 4.0


2 W,So Fo Ad 4.0 PSV
3 W,So Spaceship 1.0
Fwa
II 11 " 4 W+ FM o (2) A,Balls 4.5
5 D,S+ Mo Spaceship 3.0
Smoke
III 2" 6 D+ Mao (2) H P 3.0
7 Do Fo A P
8 Do Fo Vase 4.5
9 Do A
IV 8 " 10 Wo Mp,FDo (H) 2.0
V 9" 11 Wo FM o A P 1.0 INC0M
12 Wo F- (2) Ad
13 Wo Fo Phoenix 1.0
VI 12 " 14 W+ Fo Sword in 2.5
Stone
15 Do Fo Mandolin 2.5
16 Do Fo A 2.5
17 Do f9 ( 2) Masks
V II 3" 18 Do Mp.Fro H P 3.0
19 D,So Arrowhead
f2
20 W+ Mq (2) H 2.5
V III 5" 21 w+ FM .Fro A,Ls P 4.5
22 Do Fo Bt 3.0
23 Do F2 T rilo b ite
IX 10 " 24 Wo Mo Volcano 5.5
25 Do Mao (2) H 2.5
X 1" 26 W FC.FMa Underwater P 5.5 INC0M

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
206
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 23 Post
Group IV

R=26 Zf=20 ZSum= 61 P=6 ( 2)=6

Location Features Determi nants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 13 Mp FDo H= 4 Bl= Spaceship...=1


Mp,Fro (H)=l Bt=l Smoke............=1
D = 13 FM .Fro Hd = Cg= Vase..............=1
FC.FMao (Hd) = Cl = Balls............=1
Dd = M = 3 A= 6 Ex= Drums............=1
FM = 2 (A) = Fi = Phoenix........ =1
S = 5 m = 2 Ad = 3 Fd= Sword in . . . .
C = (Ad)= Ge= Stone___ =1
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= Mandolin___ =1
CF = A1 = Ls= 1 Masks............=1
FC = An = Na= T r ilo b it e ...=1
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx= Volcano........ =1
C'F= Ay = Xy= Underwater..=1
+ = + = FC' = S-Constellation (Adult) Scene
o = 19 o = 5 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = 7 w= TF = OCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV
_ = - = FT = 03r+(2)/R < .3 0 INCOM
no V = +Zd>+3.5 FABCOM
form = VF = +ep > EA ALOG
FV = OCF+C> FC CONTAM
Form Quality Y = OX+% < .70 CP
YF = +S>3 MOR
FQx FQf FY = OP < 3 o r > 8 PER
+ = + = rF = OH < 2 PSV
o = 21 o = 10 Fr = 0 R < 17 Total
w= 4 w= 4 FD = 3 Total
- = 1 - = 1 F = 15
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 61-66.5 FC-.CF+C = 1:0 Afr = 6/19=.32


Zd = -5.5 W:M = 13:5 3r+(2)/R= 12/26=.46
EB = 5:.5 EA = 5.5 W:D = 13:13 Cont:R = 17:26
eb = 6:0 ep = 6 .0 L = 15/11=1.36 H+Hd:A+Ad = 4 : 9
(FM=4 m=2 T== C'= V= Y=) F+% = 10/15=67% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
1:0
BlendsrR = 4:26 X+% = 21/26=81% H+A:HD+Ad = 11:3
a:p 9:2 A% = 9/26=35% XRT Achrom =
49/5=9.8"
Ma:Mp —
3:2 XRT Chrom =
29/5=5.8"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
207
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 24 E xperim ental
Group IV

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 1" 1 Wo FC'o A P 1.0


II 11 " 2 Wo FM .FC' .FCo A 4.5
III 33" 3 Wo Fw A 5.5
IV 20 " Rejection
V 20 " 4 Wo FMao A P 1.0
VI 28" Rejection
V II 32" 5 D+ Mpo (2 ) H P 3.0
V III 24" 6 Do Fo (2 ) A P
IX 35" Rejection
X 30" 7 Ddo Fo Bt

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
208

STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 24 Experim ental


Group IV

R=7 Z f=5 ZSum= 15 P=4 (2 )= 2

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

w = 4 FMa.FC'.FCo H= 1 Bl = ....................... =
(H)= Bt=l
D = 2 Hd = cg= —
(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = 1 M = 1 A= 5 Ex=
FM = 1 (A) = Fi=
S = m = Ad = Fd=
C = (Ad)= Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= =
CF = A1 = Ls=
FC = An = Na=
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay = Xy=
+ = 1 + = FC'= 1 S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 6 0=1 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = w= TF = OCol.Shd B1 > 0 DV
_ = —= FT = +3r+(2)/R < .3 0 INCOM
no V = 0Zd>+3.5 FABCOM
form = VF = +ep > EA ALOG
FV = UCF+C > FC CONTAM
Form Quality Y = 0X+% < .7 0 CP
YF = 0S > 3 MOR
FQx FQf FY = OP < 3 o r > 8 PER
+ = + = rF = +H < 2 PSV
o = 6 o = 2 Fr = +R < 17 Total =|
w= 1 w= 1 FD = 4 Total
- = - = F = 3
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 15-13.5 FC:CF+C = 1 : 0 Afr = 2/5=.40


Zd = 1.5 W:M = 4:1 3r+(2)/R= 2/7=.29
EB = 1:.5 EA = 1.5 W:D = 4:2 Cont:R = 3 : 7
eb = 2:2 ep = 4.0 L = 3/4=.75 H+Hd:A+Ad = 1:5
(FM=2 m= T= C‘=2 V= Y=) F+% = 2/3=67% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
Blends:R = 1 : 7 X+% = 6/7=86% H+A:HD+Ad = 6 : 0
a:p = 2:1 A% = 5/7=71% XRT Achrom =
101/5=20.2"
Ma:Mp = 1:0 XRT Chrom =
110/5=22.0"

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
209
SEQUENCE OF SCORES S u b je c t 24 Post
Group IV

Card RT No. Location Determinant(s) Content(s) POP Z Score Special

I 5" 1 Wo FC' FMao A P 1.0


II 26" 2 Wo FM o A 4.5
III 42" 3 Wo FC'w A 5.5
IV 16" 4 Do FYo xy
V 16" 5 Wo Fo A P 1.0
VI 23" 6 w+ Frw Tug Boat
V II 21 " 7 D+ Mpg (2) H P 3.0
V III 48" 8 Do FM o (2) A P
9 Wo Fw Bt 5.5
IX 13" 10 Wo FCw Bt 5.5
X 5" 11 W+ FCo Bt 5.5

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
210
STRUCTURAL SUMMARY S u b je c t 24 Post
Group IV

R=ll Zf =8 ZSum= 31.5 P=4 ( 2)=2

Location Features Determinants Contents Contents


(Blends F irst) (Idiographic)

W = 8 FC1. FMao H= 1 Bl = Tug B oat...=l


(H)= Bt=l
D = 3 Hd = Cg=
(Hd) = Cl=
Dd = M = 1 A= 5 Ex=
FM = 2 (A) = Fi=
S = m = Ad = Fd=
C = (Ad)= Ge=
DW = Cn = Ab = Hh= =

CF = A! = Ls=
FC = 2 An = Na= —
DQ M Quality C' = Art = Sx=
C'F= Ay = Xy=
+ = 3 + = FC' = 1 S-Constellation (Adult)
o = 8 o = 1 T = OFV+VF+V+FD > 2 Special Scoring
v = w= TF = TTCol .Shd B1 > 0 DV
- = FT = IJ3r+(2)/R < .3 0 INCOM
no V = jfZd>+3.5 FABCOM
form = VF = +ep> EA ALOG
FV = OCF+C > FC CONTAM
Form Quality Y = +X+% < .70 CP
YF = 0S> 3 MOR
FQx FQf FY = 1 OP < 3 o r> 8 PER
+ = + = rF = +H < 2 PSV
o = 7 o = 1 Fr = 1 +R < 17 Total =i
w= 4 w= 1 FD = 5^ Total
_ = - = F = 2
no
form =

Ratios, Percentages, and Derivations

ZSum-Zest = 31.5-■24..0 FC:CF+C = 2:0 Afr = 4/7=.57


Zd 7.5 W:M 8:1 3r+(2)/R= 5/11=.46
EB 1:1 EA = 2 .0 W:D 8:3 Cont:R = 5:11
eb 2:3 ep = 6 .0 L 2/9=.22 H+Hd:A+Ad = 1 : 5
(FM=3 m= T= C‘ =2 V= Y=l) F+% 1/2=50% (H)+(Hd):(A)+(Ad)=
Blends:R = 1:11 X+% 7/11=64% H+A:HD+Ad = 6 : 0
a:p 3:1 A% 5/11=45% XRT Achrom =
81/5=16.2
Ma:Mp =0:0 XRT Chrom =
134/5=26.8"

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
211

Appendix J

Exner Age Norms

Adu1t*(n=325) Childrens', Age 5 * * (n=110)

M SD M SD

R 21.75 5.10 15.20 4.20


Location
Features
U 7.04 2.80 9.20 3.70
D 13.50 4.70 5.60 2.00
Dd 1.21 1.10 .40 .30
DU - - .10 -

S 1.05 .70 .70 .70


DQ+ - - 2.60 1.70
DQo - - 7.10 3.60
DQv - - 4.80 2.30
DQ- .70 .80
Deter-
mi nants
H 3.48 1.80 .80 .60
FM 2.36 1.40 2.80 1.20
m .73 .60 .10 .10
FC 3.56 1.20 .50 .80
CF 1.23 .90 1.90 .60
C+Cn .48 .60 .90 .70
Sum C 5.27 2.30 3.50 1.70
Sum C' .63 .80 .30 .30
Sum T 1.18 .90 .80 .40
Sum Y 1.11 .60 .50 .40
Sum V .36 .30 .00 “
Sum
Shading 3.28 1.80 1.60 1.00
FD .92 .70 .20 .20
Fr+rF .14 .70 .70 .50
(2 ) 7.61 2.70 7.30 3.30
F 9.83 3.20 8 .1 0 2.90
P 6.45 2.70 3.80 2.40
Zf 9.41 2.30 10.60 3.70
Blends 4.90 1.80 1.90 .70
Pure M - - 1.60 .80
CO
O

Fd .30** 1.50 (age 6-7) .70**


Rations &
Deriva­
tions
Lamda .82 .30 1.14 .39
X+% .81 .12 .81 .11
F+% .89 .08 .83 .12

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
212

Adult*(n=325) Childrens', Age 5 * * (

M SD M SD

Afr .69 .06 1.07 .29


3r+(2)/R .37 .06 .61 .14
Zd - -1.10 2.61
M+Hd 4.74 1.40 3.40 1.30
k% .39 .08 .54 .13
Special
Scores
INCOM .28 .02 1.10 .70
FABCOM .12 .10 .60 .30
ALOG .13 .10 1.20 .50
PSV (within) .05 .20 .90 .60
(across) .04 .10
CONTAM .00 - .10 -

CP - .10 .10
DV .18 .10 2.10 1.30
PER .63 .37 4.40 2.10
Ratio
Directionality
EA > ep 70% 9%
FC > CF+C - 3%

* Source Exner (1978)


* * Source Exner (Note 1)
* * * Source Exner (Note 2)

Reproduced with permission from John E. Exner, J r ., Ph.D.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
213

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Bonime, W. The clinical use of dreams. New York: Basic Books, 1962.

Brenman, B ., & G ill, M.M. Hypnotherapy: a survey of the lite ra tu re .


New York: International Universities Press, 1978.

Chalmers, L. S. & DeMartino, M. F. (ed) Understanding human motivation,


The World Publishing C ., Cleveland, 1965.

Cheek, D. B ., & LeCron, L. M. Clinical hypnotherapy. New York: Grune &


Stratton, 1968.

Coe, W. C ., & Steen, P. Examining the Relationship Between Believing


One W ill Respond to Hypnotic Suggestions and Hypnotic Responsiveness.
The American Journal of Clinical Hypnosis, 1981, 24, 22-32.

Fordham, M. Jungian psychotherapy: a study in analytical psychology.


New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1978.

Freud, S. & Breuer, 0. Studies on hysteria. New York: Avon Books,


1966.

Fromm, E. The forgotten language: an introduction to the understanding


of dreams, fa iry tales and myths. New York: Grove Press, 1957.

Gruenewald, D. A Psychoanalytic View of Hypnosis. The American Journal


of Clinical Hypnosis, 1982, 241, 185-190;

Haley, J. Uncommon therapy: the psychiatric technigues of Milton A.


Erickson, M.D. New York: W. W. Norton & Co., 1973.

Haley, J. Strategies of psychotherapy. New York: Grune & Stratton,


1963.

Hal pern, F. A clinical approach to children's Rorschach's. New York:


Grune & Stratton, 1968.

Hammer, E. F. (ed.) Use of interpretation in treatment: technique and


a r t . New York: Grune & Stratton, 1968.

Kroger, W. S. Clinical and experimental hypnosis: in medicine,


dentistry and psychology, Second Edition. Philadelphia: 37 B.
Lippincott Company, 1977.

Kroger, W. S. & Felzer, W. D. Hypnosis and behavior modification,


imagery conditions. J. B. Lippincott Co., Philadelphia, 1976.

Langs, R. The listening process. New York: Jason Aronson, In c ., 1978.

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
214
Langs, R. The bipersonal f ie ld . New York: Jason Aronson In c ., 1976.

Moore, M. R. Ericksonian Theories of Hypnosis. The American Journal of


Clinical Hypnosis, 1982, 24, 183-184. •

Moss, C. S. Dreams, images and fantasy: a sematic d ifferen tial


casebook. University of Illin o is Press, Urbana, ItToT

Piotrowski, Z. A. Perceptanalysis. New York: The MacMillian Co.,


1957.

Rapaport, D.; G ill, M. M., & Schafer, R. Diagnostic psychological


testing. New York: International Universities Press, 1970.

Rhodes, R. H. (ed.) Therapy through hypnosis. North Hollywood:


Wilshire Book Company, 1979.

Rhodes, R. H. Hypnosis: theory, practice and application. The Citadel


Press, New York, 1970.

Rickers-Ovsiankina (ed.) Rorschach psychology. John Wiley & Sons,


In c ., New York, 1960.

Rossi, E. L. (e d .). The collected papers of Milton H. Erickson on


hypnosis, vol. I: the nature of hypnosis and suggestion. New
York: Irvington Publishers, In c ., 1980.

Rossi, E. L. (ed.) The collected papers of Milton H. Erickson on


hypnosis, vol. I I : hypnotic alteration of sensory, perceptual and
psychophysiological processes. New York: Irvington Publishers,
In c ., 1980.

Rossi, E. L. (ed.) The collected papers of Milton H. Erickson on


hypnosis, vol. I l l : hypnotic investigation of psychodynamic
processes^ New York: Irvington Publishers, In c ., 1980.

Rossi, E. L. (ed.) The collected papers of Milton H. Erickson on


hypnosis, vol. IV: innovative hypnotherapy. New York: Irvington
Publishers, Inc. 1980.

Schafer, R. The clinical application of psychological tests:


diagnostic summaries and case studies. International Universities
Press, New York, 1970.

Schafer, R. Psychoanalytic interpretation in Rorschach testing. New


York: Grune & Stratton, 1954.

Spiegel, H. M. & Spiegel, D. Trance and treatment: clin ica l uses of


hypnosis. New York: Basic Books, 1978.

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.
Sullivan, H. S. Clinical studies in psychiatry. New York: W. W.
Norton & Company, In c ., 1956.

Watzlawick, P. The language of change: elements of therapeutic


communication. Basic Books, Inc. New York, 1978.

Wolberg, L. R. The technique of psychotherapy (second edition vol. I &


I I . New York: Grune & Stratton, 1967.

Zeig, J. K. Ericksonian approaches to hypnosis and psychotherapy. New


York: Brunner/Mazel, 1982.

Reproduced with permission o f the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.

You might also like